CS963 Printer

User's Guide

December 2024 www.lexmark.com

User's Guide

Contents

Safety information
Conventions ........................................................................................................ 12
Product statements ............................................................................................. 12
Learn about the printer
Finding information about the printer .................................................................. 17
Finding the printer serial number ........................................................................ 18
Printer configurations .......................................................................................... 20
Basic model............................................................................................................... 20
Configured model ...................................................................................................... 21
Using the control panel ....................................................................................... 23
Home screen icons ............................................................................................. 24
Colors of the indicator light.................................................................................. 25
Locating the security slot..................................................................................... 26
Selecting paper ................................................................................................... 26
Paper guidelines........................................................................................................ 26
Paper characteristics................................................................................................. 26
Weight................................................................................................................................27
Curl ....................................................................................................................................27
Smoothness.......................................................................................................................27
Moisture content ................................................................................................................27
Grain direction ...................................................................................................................27
Fiber content......................................................................................................................27
Unacceptable paper .................................................................................................. 28
Using recycled paper................................................................................................. 28
Storing paper............................................................................................................. 28
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead ................................................................ 29
Supported paper sizes .............................................................................................. 29
Paper sizes supported by the basic configuration .............................................................29
Paper sizes supported by the optional trays......................................................................33
Paper sizes supported by the output bins .........................................................................38
Paper sizes supported for staple and punch jobs..............................................................56
Paper sizes supported for fold jobs ...................................................................................69
Paper sizes supported for offset stacking jobs ..................................................................86
Supported paper weights .......................................................................................... 96
Supported paper types .............................................................................................. 96
Additional printer features and support ............................................................. 102
Supported applications............................................................................................ 102
Supported flash drives and file types ...................................................................... 102
Flash drives .....................................................................................................................102
File types .........................................................................................................................102
Available internal options ........................................................................................ 102

2
User's Guide

Set up, install, and configure

Selecting a location for the printer..................................................................... 104
Printer ports....................................................................................................... 105
Configuring apps and solutions......................................................................... 107
Using Display Customization................................................................................... 107
Configuring bookmarks ........................................................................................... 108
Configuring Address Book....................................................................................... 109
Setting up and using the accessibility features ................................................. 109
Activating Voice Guidance....................................................................................... 109
Deactivating Voice Guidance ...................................................................................110
Navigating the screen using gestures ......................................................................110
Using the on‑screen keyboard .................................................................................115
Enabling Magnification mode ...................................................................................115
Adjusting the Voice Guidance speech rate ..............................................................116
Adjusting the default headphone volume .................................................................116
Adjusting the default internal speaker volume .........................................................116
Enabling spoken passwords or personal identification numbers .............................117
Loading paper and specialty media ...................................................................117
Setting the size and type of the specialty media ......................................................117
Configuring Universal paper settings .......................................................................117
Loading the 550-sheet tray.......................................................................................117
Loading the 2000-sheet tandem tray....................................................................... 122
Loading the 1500-sheet tray.................................................................................... 126
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................. 131
Linking trays ............................................................................................................ 135
Installing and updating software, drivers, and firmware .................................... 136
Installing the printer software .................................................................................. 136
Adding printers to a computer ................................................................................. 137
Exporting a configuration file ................................................................................... 138
Importing a configuration file ................................................................................... 138
Adding available options in the print driver ............................................................. 139
For Windows users..........................................................................................................139
For Macintosh users ........................................................................................................139
Printer firmware instructions.................................................................................... 139
Checking the printer firmware version .............................................................................139
Downloading the printer firmware....................................................................................140
Updating firmware ...........................................................................................................140
Installing hardware options ............................................................................... 143
Installing the optional 550‑sheet tray....................................................................... 143
Installing the 2 x 550-sheet tray .............................................................................. 152
Installing the 2000-sheet tandem tray ..................................................................... 162
Installing the cabinet................................................................................................ 173
Installing the 1500‑sheet tray .................................................................................. 182
Installing the staple finisher ..................................................................................... 191
Installing the offset stacker...................................................................................... 207
Installing the folding paper transport ....................................................................... 215

3
User's Guide

Installing the staple, hole punch finisher and paper transport option ...................... 235
Installing the staple, hole punch finisher and folding paper transport ..................... 257
Installing the booklet finisher and paper transport option........................................ 286
Installing the booklet finisher and folding paper transport....................................... 310
Installing the intelligent storage drive ...................................................................... 341
Installing an internal solutions port .......................................................................... 347
Installing the card reader......................................................................................... 355
Changing the printer port settings after installing an internal solutions port............ 362
Networking ........................................................................................................ 362
Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network ............................................................... 362
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS). 363
Configuring Wi‑Fi Direct .......................................................................................... 363
Connecting a mobile device to the printer ............................................................... 364
Using Wi‑Fi Direct............................................................................................................364
Using Wi‑Fi ......................................................................................................................365
Connecting a computer to the printer ...................................................................... 365
For Windows users..........................................................................................................365
For Macintosh users ........................................................................................................365
Deactivating the Wi‑Fi network................................................................................ 365
Checking the printer connectivity ............................................................................ 366
Setting up serial printing (Windows only) ................................................................ 366
Secure the printer
Erasing printer memory..................................................................................... 367
Erasing printer storage drive ............................................................................. 367
Restoring factory default settings...................................................................... 367
Statement of Volatility........................................................................................ 368
Print
Printing from a computer................................................................................... 369
.......................................................................................................................... 369
Printing from a mobile device............................................................................ 369
Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Print ................................................. 369
Printing from a mobile device using Mopria™ Print Service ................................... 370
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint............................................................ 370
Printing from a mobile device using Wi‑Fi Direct®.................................................. 370
Printing from a flash drive ................................................................................. 371
Configuring confidential jobs ............................................................................. 372
Printing confidential and other held jobs ........................................................... 373
Printing a font sample list .................................................................................. 374
Printing a directory list....................................................................................... 374
Placing separator sheets in print jobs ............................................................... 374
Canceling a print job ......................................................................................... 374
Adjusting toner darkness................................................................................... 375

4
User's Guide

Printer menus
Menu map ......................................................................................................... 376
Device ............................................................................................................... 377
Preferences ............................................................................................................. 377
Eco-Mode ................................................................................................................ 380
Remote Operator Panel .......................................................................................... 381
Notifications............................................................................................................. 381
Power Management ................................................................................................ 386
Share Data with Lexmark ........................................................................................ 387
Accessibility............................................................................................................. 388
Restore Factory Defaults......................................................................................... 389
Maintenance............................................................................................................ 389
Configuration Menu .........................................................................................................389
Out of Service Erase .......................................................................................................396
Update firmware ...................................................................................................... 398
About this Printer..................................................................................................... 398
Print ................................................................................................................... 399
Layout...................................................................................................................... 399
Finishing .................................................................................................................. 400
Setup ....................................................................................................................... 403
Quality ..................................................................................................................... 407
Job Accounting ........................................................................................................ 409
PDF ..........................................................................................................................411
PostScript ................................................................................................................ 412
PCL ......................................................................................................................... 414
Image ...................................................................................................................... 418
Paper................................................................................................................. 419
Tray Configuration ................................................................................................... 419
Media Configuration ................................................................................................ 420
Bin Configuration..................................................................................................... 421
USB Drive ......................................................................................................... 422
Flash Drive Print...................................................................................................... 422
Network/Ports.................................................................................................... 425
Network Overview ................................................................................................... 425
Wireless................................................................................................................... 426
Wi‑Fi Direct.............................................................................................................. 436
Mobile Services Management ................................................................................. 437
Ethernet................................................................................................................... 437
TCP/IP..................................................................................................................... 442
SNMP ...................................................................................................................... 444
IPSec....................................................................................................................... 445
802.1x...................................................................................................................... 448
LPD Configuration ................................................................................................... 449
HTTP/FTP Settings ................................................................................................. 450
ThinPrint .................................................................................................................. 452
USB ......................................................................................................................... 452

5
User's Guide

Restrict external network access............................................................................. 453

Security ............................................................................................................. 455
Login Methods......................................................................................................... 455
Manage Permissions .......................................................................................................455
Local Accounts ................................................................................................................456
Default Login Methods.....................................................................................................457
Schedule USB Devices ........................................................................................... 457
Security Audit Log ................................................................................................... 458
Login Restrictions.................................................................................................... 461
Confidential Print Setup........................................................................................... 462
Encryption ............................................................................................................... 463
Erase Temporary Data Files.................................................................................... 464
Solutions LDAP Settings ......................................................................................... 464
Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................... 465
Cloud Services .................................................................................................. 466
Cloud Services Enrollment ...................................................................................... 466
Reports.............................................................................................................. 467
Menu Settings Page ................................................................................................ 467
Device ..................................................................................................................... 467
Print ......................................................................................................................... 468
Network ................................................................................................................... 468
Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 469
Forms Merge ..................................................................................................... 469
Printing the Menu Settings Page....................................................................... 471
Printer finisher options
Using the staple finisher.................................................................................... 472
.......................................................................................................................... 472
.......................................................................................................................... 472
Using the staple, hole‑punch finisher ................................................................ 472
.......................................................................................................................... 473
.......................................................................................................................... 473
Using the offset stacker..................................................................................... 473
.......................................................................................................................... 473
.......................................................................................................................... 473
Using the booklet finisher.................................................................................. 474
.......................................................................................................................... 474
.......................................................................................................................... 474
Using the paper transport with folding option.................................................... 475
.......................................................................................................................... 475
.......................................................................................................................... 475
Maintain the printer

6
User's Guide

Checking the status of parts and supplies ........................................................ 476

Configuring supply notifications ........................................................................ 476
Setting up email alerts....................................................................................... 476
Generating reports and logs.............................................................................. 477
Ordering parts and supplies .............................................................................. 478
Contact information and precaution ........................................................................ 478
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies ............................................................ 478
Ordering a toner cartridge ....................................................................................... 478
Return Program toner cartridges for Lexmark CS963 .....................................................479
High Yield Return Program toner cartridges for Lexmark CS963....................................479
High Yield Regular toner cartridges for Lexmark CS963.................................................479
Ordering a black imaging unit.................................................................................. 480
Ordering a color imaging kit .................................................................................... 480
Ordering the waste toner bottle ............................................................................... 480
Ordering a staple cartridge...................................................................................... 480
Ordering a maintenance kit ..................................................................................... 480
Replacing parts and supplies ............................................................................ 481
Replacing a toner cartridge ..................................................................................... 481
Replacing the black imaging unit............................................................................. 484
Replacing the color imaging kit ............................................................................... 495
Replacing the waste toner bottle ............................................................................. 506
Replacing the fuser ................................................................................................. 509
Replacing the tray insert.......................................................................................... 513
Replacing the size guides in the optional 550‑sheet tray........................................ 514
Replacing the cover in the optional 550‑sheet tray ................................................. 517
Replacing the booklet finisher top bin extension ..................................................... 519
Replacing the hole punch box ................................................................................. 521
Replacing the standard bin...................................................................................... 524
Replacing the fan cover........................................................................................... 526
Replacing the right cover......................................................................................... 528
Replacing the paper transport connector cover ...................................................... 530
Replacing the staple cartridge unit .......................................................................... 533
Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple finisher ........................................................533
Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple, hole punch finisher ....................................536
Replacing the staple cartridge in the booklet finisher ......................................................541
Replacing the staple cartridge holders in the booklet finisher .........................................546
Resetting the supply usage counters ...................................................................... 549
Cleaning printer parts........................................................................................ 550
Cleaning the printer ................................................................................................. 550
Cleaning the touch screen....................................................................................... 551
Cleaning the printhead lenses................................................................................. 551
Emptying the hole punch box .................................................................................. 554
Saving energy and paper .................................................................................. 557
Configuring the power save mode settings ............................................................. 557
Adjusting the brightness of the display.................................................................... 558
Conserving supplies ................................................................................................ 558

7
User's Guide

Moving the printer to another location............................................................... 558

Troubleshoot a problem
Print quality problems........................................................................................ 560
Printer error codes ............................................................................................ 563
Printing problems .............................................................................................. 581
Print quality is poor.................................................................................................. 581
Blank or white pages .......................................................................................................581
Dark print .........................................................................................................................582
Ghost images ..................................................................................................................583
Gray or colored background ............................................................................................584
Incorrect margins.............................................................................................................585
Light print .........................................................................................................................586
Missing colors ..................................................................................................................587
Mottled print and dots ......................................................................................................588
Print crooked or skewed ..................................................................................................590
Solid color or black images..............................................................................................591
Text or images cut off.......................................................................................................592
Toner easily rubs off.........................................................................................................593
Uneven print density........................................................................................................594
Horizontal dark lines ........................................................................................................595
Vertical dark lines ............................................................................................................596
Horizontal white lines.......................................................................................................597
Vertical white lines ...........................................................................................................598
Repeating defects............................................................................................................600
Print jobs do not print .............................................................................................. 600
Confidential and other held documents do not print................................................ 601
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper ............................................ 601
Slow printing............................................................................................................ 601
The printer is not responding ............................................................................ 602
Unable to read flash drive ................................................................................. 603
Enabling the USB port....................................................................................... 603
Clearing jams .................................................................................................... 603
Avoiding jams .......................................................................................................... 603
Identifying jam locations .......................................................................................... 605
Paper jam in the standard tray ................................................................................ 607
Paper jam in the optional 550‑sheet tray................................................................. 609
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder ..................................................................... 613
Paper jam in the 2 x 550-sheet tray ........................................................................ 614
Paper jam in the 2000‑sheet tandem tray ............................................................... 616
Paper jam in the 1500‑sheet tray ............................................................................ 617
Paper jam in door B................................................................................................. 619
Paper jam in the standard bin ................................................................................. 625
Paper jam in the staple finisher ............................................................................... 625
Paper jam in the folding paper transport ................................................................. 629
Paper jam in the staple, hole punch finisher ........................................................... 633
Paper jam in the booklet finisher ............................................................................. 651
Network connection problems........................................................................... 676
Cannot open Embedded Web Server ..................................................................... 676

8
User's Guide

Cannot connect the printer to the Wi‑Fi network ..................................................... 677

Hardware options problems .............................................................................. 677
Cannot detect internal option .................................................................................. 677
Internal solutions port does not operate correctly ................................................... 678
Parallel or serial interface card does not operate correctly ..................................... 678
Defective flash detected .......................................................................................... 679
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources ........................................... 679
Issues with supplies .......................................................................................... 679
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch ............................................................ 679
Refilled regular [color] cartridge .............................................................................. 680
Non‑Lexmark supply ............................................................................................... 680
Paper feed problems......................................................................................... 681
Paper curl ................................................................................................................ 681
Envelope seals when printing.................................................................................. 681
Collated printing does not work ............................................................................... 681
Tray linking does not work....................................................................................... 682
Paper frequently jams ............................................................................................. 682
Jammed pages are not reprinted ............................................................................ 682
Color quality problems ...................................................................................... 683
Modifying the colors in printed output...................................................................... 683
FAQ about color printing.......................................................................................... 683
What is RGB color? .........................................................................................................683
What is CMYK color? ......................................................................................................684
How is color specified in a document to be printed? .......................................................684
How does the printer know what color to print?...............................................................684
What is manual color correction? ....................................................................................684
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)? .....................................684
The print appears tinted .......................................................................................... 685
Contacting customer support ............................................................................ 685
Recycle and dispose
Recycling Lexmark products ............................................................................. 686
Recycling Lexmark packaging .......................................................................... 686
Notices
Product information ........................................................................................... 687
Edition and legal notices ................................................................................... 687
Edition notices ......................................................................................................... 687
GOVERNMENT END USERS................................................................................. 688
Trademarks ............................................................................................................. 688
Licensing notices..................................................................................................... 688
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS ... 689
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY......................................................................689
Limited warranty ..............................................................................................................689
Limited warranty service..................................................................................................689
Extent of limited warranty ................................................................................................690
Limitation of liability .........................................................................................................691

9
User's Guide

Additional rights ...............................................................................................................691

Specifications .................................................................................................... 691
Laser notice............................................................................................................. 691
Temperature information ......................................................................................... 692
Información de la energía de México ...................................................................... 692
Product power consumption.................................................................................... 693
Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................. 693
Hibernate Mode....................................................................................................... 694
Off mode.................................................................................................................. 694
Total energy usage .................................................................................................. 694
Environmental and sustainability notices .......................................................... 694
Noise emission levels.............................................................................................. 694
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive ........................ 695
India E-Waste notice ............................................................................................... 695
Lithium‑ion rechargeable battery............................................................................. 696
Regulation (EU) 2023/1542..................................................................................... 696
WEEE (Turkey)........................................................................................................ 697
Guide de Tri pour la France..................................................................................... 697
Environmental labeling for packaging ..................................................................... 698
Product disposal...................................................................................................... 698
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling .............................................. 698
環境保護署廢乾電池回收標誌注意事項 ................................................................... 699
經濟部標準檢驗局 (BSMI) 電池聲明 ........................................................................ 699
BSMI RoHS information 限用物質含有情況標示 ..................................................... 699
中国 RoHS 计划的信息............................................................................................ 700
ENERGY STAR ....................................................................................................... 702
Notices for wireless products ............................................................................ 703
Regulatory notices for wireless products................................................................. 703
Modular component notice ...................................................................................... 703
Exposure to radio frequency radiation..................................................................... 703
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada ..................................... 703
Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada.......................................703
Para su uso en México............................................................................................ 704
European Community (EC) directives conformity ................................................... 704
Restrictions ......................................................................................................................704
EU and other countries statement of radio transmitter operational frequency bands and
maximum RF power .......................................................................................................................705
United Kingdom (UK) conformity............................................................................. 705
Restrictions or requirements in the UK............................................................................705
UK statement of radio transmitter operational frequency bands and maximum RF
power..............................................................................................................................................705
NCC Type Approval Devices Notice........................................................................ 706
Notice to users in Thailand...................................................................................... 706
Class A device notices ...................................................................................... 707
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement.. 707
BSMI EMC 注意事項 ............................................................................................... 708
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada compliance statement . 708

10
User's Guide

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique

Canada...........................................................................................................................................708
CCC EMC 注意事项 ................................................................................................ 708
日本の VCCI 規定.................................................................................................... 709
한국 KC 인증서......................................................................................................... 709
Aviso aos usuários de produtos Classe A no Brasil ................................................ 709
European Community (EC) directives conformity ................................................... 709
United Kingdom (UK) conformity............................................................................. 710
Radio interference notice ........................................................................................ 710
Other regulatory notices.................................................................................... 710
高溫警告標籤........................................................................................................... 710
Deutsche Kontaktinformationen .............................................................................. 710
Static sensitivity notice .............................................................................................711
Applicability of Regulation (EU) 2019/2015 and (EU) 2019/2020 ............................711
The UK Product Security and Telecommunications Infrastructure Act 2022 (PSTI Act)
—Summary Statement of Compliance ..............................................................................711
Thailand NBTC technical standards conformity statement ..................................... 712
Aviso aos usuários de produtos no Brasil ............................................................... 712
Index ............................................................................................................713

11
Safety information

Safety information
Conventions
Note: A note identifies information that could help you.
Warning: A warning identifies something that could damage the product hardware or
software.
WARNING (in full capitals): A WARNING indicates a risk of death or serious injury if not
avoided.
CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.
Different types of caution statements include:

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
Indicates a risk of injury.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
Indicates a risk of electrical shock.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
Indicates a risk of burn if touched.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD
Indicates a crush hazard.

CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD
Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.

Product statements

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

12
Safety information

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or UPS devices. The power capacity of these types
of accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in
a risk of fire, property damage, or poor printer performance.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
Only a Lexmark Inline Surge Protector that is properly connected between
the printer and the power cord provided with the printer may be used with
this product. The use of non-Lexmark surge protection devices may result
in a risk of fire, property damage, or poor printer performance.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product near
water or wet locations.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make any
electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or
telephone, during a lightning storm.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do
not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power
cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things
happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord
regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet before inspecting it.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, make sure that all external connections
(such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed
in their marked plug-in ports.

13
Safety information

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all
cables from the printer before proceeding.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require two or
more people to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:

• Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.

• Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
• If the printer has separate floor-standing optional trays or output options attached to it, then
disconnect them before moving the printer.
• If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when
passing over thresholds and breaks in flooring.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays or output
options, then remove the output options and lift the printer off the trays. Do not try to lift the
printer and any options at the same time.
• Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the
printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the
dimensions of the options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
• Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.

14
Safety information

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD
Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a caster
base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible
injury. For more information on supported configurations, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD
To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep
all other trays closed until needed.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD
To avoid the risk of a pinch injury, use caution in areas marked with this
label. Pinch injuries may occur around moving parts, such as gears, doors,
trays, and covers.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified in the User’s Guide may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not
recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium
batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

15
Safety information

• INGESTION HAZARD: This product

contains a button cell or coin battery.
• DEATH or serious injury can occur if
ingested.
• A swallowed button cell or coin battery
can cause Internal Chemical Burns
in as little as 2 hours.
• KEEP new and used batteries OUT
OF REACH of CHILDREN.
• Seek immediate medical attention if
a battery is suspected to be
swallowed or inserted inside any part
of the body.

Remove and immediately recycle or dispose of used batteries according to local

regulations and keep away from children. Do not dispose of batteries in household trash or
incinerate. Even used batteries may cause severe injury or death. Call a local poison
control center for treatment information.
Battery type: CR6821
Nominal battery voltage: 3V
Do not force discharge, recharge, disassemble, heat above 60°C (140°F), or incinerate.
Doing so may result in injury due to venting, leakage, or explosion resulting in chemical
burns.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with
the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not
always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement
parts.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a
service representative.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

16
Learn about the printer

Learn about the printer

Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here

Initial setup instructions See the setup documentation that came with
the printer.

Go to www.lexmark.com/downloads.
• Printer software
• Print or fax driver
• Printer firmware
• Utility

Interactive User’s Guide Go to https://support.lexmark.com.

How‑to videos Go to https://infoserve.lexmark.com/ids/idv.

Help information for using the printer Help for Microsoft Windows or Macintosh
software. operating systems—Open a printer software
program or application, and then click Help.

Click to view context‑sensitive

information.

Notes
• Help is automatically installed
with the printer software.
• Depending on the operating
system, the printer software is
either in the printer program
folder or on the desktop.

17
Learn about the printer

What are you looking for? Find it here

Go to https://support.lexmark.com.
• Documentation
• Live chat support
• E‑mail support Note: Select your country or region,
• Voice support and then select your product to view
the appropriate support site.

Support contact information for your country

or region can be found on the website or on
the printed warranty that came with the
printer.

Have the following information ready when

you contact customer support:

• Place and date of purchase

• Machine type and serial number

For more information, see Finding the

printer serial number on page 18.

Warranty information varies by country or

• Safety information region:
• Regulatory information
• Warranty information • In the U.S.—See the Statement of
• Environmental information Limited Warranty included with the
printer, or go to https://
support.lexmark.com.
• In other countries and regions—
See the printed warranty that came
with the printer.

Product Information Guide—See the

documentation that came with the printer or
go to https://support.lexmark.com.

Information on Lexmark digital passport Go to https://csr.lexmark.com/digital-

passport.php.

Finding the printer serial number

1. Open the tray.

18
Learn about the printer

2. Locate the serial number at the right side of the printer.

19
Learn about the printer

Printer configurations

Note: Make sure to configure the printer on a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.

Basic model

1 Control panel

2 USB port

3 Multipurpose feeder

4 Standard 550‑sheet tray

5 Standard bin

20
Learn about the printer

Configured model

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD
Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a caster
base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible
injury. For more information on supported configurations, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD
Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a caster
base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible
injury. For more information on supported configurations, contact the place
where you purchased the printer.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD
To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep
all other trays closed until needed.

21
Learn about the printer

# Hardware option Alternative hardware

option

1 Staple finisher1
• Offset stacker1
• Paper transport
• Paper transport
with folding
option

2 1500-sheet tray2 None

22
Learn about the printer

# Hardware option Alternative hardware

option

3 Optional 550-sheet None

tray3

4 2000-sheet tandem
tray4 • 2 x 550-sheet
tray4
• Cabinet4

5 Booklet finisher5 Staple, hole punch

finisher5
1 Cannot be installed together with a booklet finisher or staple, hole punch
finisher.
2 Must be always installed together with an optional 550-sheet tray and either
of the following: 2 x 550-sheet tray or 2000-sheet tandem tray.
3 Must be always installed directly under the printer and must not be installed
together with another optional 550-sheet tray.
4 Must be always installed under the optional 550-sheet tray.
5 Must be always installed together with an optional 550-sheet tray and one of
the following: 2 x 550-sheet tray, 2000-sheet tandem tray, or cabinet.

Using the control panel

23
Learn about the printer

Control panel part Function

1 Power button
• Turn on or turn off the printer.

Note: To turn off the

printer, press and hold
the power button for five
seconds.

• Set the printer to Sleep mode.

• Wake the printer from Sleep or
Hibernate mode.

2 Display
• View the printer messages and
supply status.
• Set up and operate the printer.

3 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.

Home screen icons

Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization
settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

24
Learn about the printer

# Icon name Function

1 User Show if a user is logged

in to the printer.

2 Displayed information Show a customized

printer information such
as the printer IP
address or the date and
time.

3 Supply Show the status of

supplies.

4 Notification
• Show a printer
warning or error
message
whenever the
printer requires
intervention to
continue
processing.
• View more
information on
the printer
warning or
message, and on
how to clear it.

5 Print Print photos and

documents.

6 Job Queue Show all the current

print jobs.

7 Settings Access the printer

menus.

8 Address Book Access, create, and

organize contacts.

Colors of the indicator light

Color of the indicator light Printer status

Off The printer is off.

Solid blue The printer is ready.

Blinking blue The printer is printing or processing data.

Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.

25
Learn about the printer

Color of the indicator light Printer status

Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.

Blinking amber The printer is in Deep Sleep or Hibernate

mode.

Locating the security slot

The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. Attach a security lock compatible with
most laptop computers in the location shown to secure the printer in place.

Selecting paper
Paper guidelines
Use the appropriate paper to prevent jams and help ensure trouble‑free printing.

• Always use new, undamaged paper.

• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is
usually indicated on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic
printing.

For more information, see the Paper and Specialty Media Guide.

Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors
before printing on them.

26
Learn about the printer

Weight

Trays can feed paper of varying weights. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) may not be stiff
enough to feed properly, and may cause jams. For more information, see the “Supported
paper weights” topic.

Curl

Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding
problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to
high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions can
contribute to paper curling before printing and can cause feeding problems.

Smoothness

Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it
properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. We
recommend the use of paper with 50 Sheffield points.

Moisture content

The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the printer ability to feed the
paper correctly. Leave paper in its original wrapper until you use it. Exposure of paper to
moisture changes can degrade its performance.

Before printing, store paper in its original wrapper for 24 to 48 hours. The environment in
which the paper is stored must be the same as the printer. Extend the time several days if
the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment.
Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Grain direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain
long which runs the length of the paper, or grain short which runs the width of the paper.
For recommended grain direction, see the “Supported paper weights” topic.

Fiber content

Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100 percent chemically treated pulped
wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer
paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can
negatively affect paper handling.

27
Learn about the printer

Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

• Chemically treated papers that are used to make copies without carbon paper. They are also
known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR)
paper.
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer.
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser.
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater
than ±2.3 mm (±0.09 in.). For example, optical character recognition (OCR) forms.

Sometimes, registration can be adjusted with a software app to print successfully on these
forms.
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, or thermal papers.
• Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers.
• Papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European).
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb).
• Multiple‑part forms or documents.

Using recycled paper

Lexmark works to reduce the environmental impact of paper by providing customers
choices when it comes to printing. One way we achieve this is by testing products to
ensure recycled paper may be used—specifically, papers made with 30%, 50%, and 100%
post-consumer recycled content. Our expectation is that recycled papers perform as well
as virgin paper in our printers. While no official standard exists for office equipment use of
paper, Lexmark uses European Standard EN 12281 as a minimum properties standard. To
ensure breadth of testing, test paper includes 100% recycled papers from North America,
Europe, and Asia, and tests are conducted at 8–80% relative humidity. Testing includes
duplex printing. Office paper using renewable, recycled, or chlorine-free content may all be
used.

Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

• Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours
before printing.
• Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative
humidity is 40 percent.
• Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–
75°F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The
carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

28
Learn about the printer

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

• Use grain long paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing
process.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based
generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
• Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large
quantities. This action determines whether the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead affects
print quality.
• When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
• When printing on letterhead, load the paper in the proper orientation for your printer. For
more information, see the Paper and Specialty Media Guide.

Supported paper sizes

Paper sizes supported by the basic configuration

Paper size Orientation Standard Multipurpose Two‑sided

550‑sheet feeder printing
tray

4x6 Card Short‑edge X ✓ X

feed

Long‑edge X X X
feed

A6 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
105 x 148 mm
Long‑edge X X X
(4.13 x feed
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
feed

Long‑edge X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge ✓ X ✓
feed
148 x 210 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(5.83 x feed
8.27 in.)

29
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Standard Multipurpose Two‑sided

550‑sheet feeder printing
tray

A4 Short‑edge ✓ X ✓
feed
210 x 297 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(8.27 x feed
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge X ✓ ✓
feed
297 x 420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge ✓ X ✓
feed
182 x 257 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(7.17 x feed
10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge X ✓ ✓
feed
257 x 364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge ✓ X ✓
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge ✓ X ✓
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ X ✓
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.5 x 11 in.)

30
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Standard Multipurpose Two‑sided

550‑sheet feeder printing
tray

Folio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge X ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge X ✓ ✓
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12.0 x 18.0
in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge X ✓ ✓
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
(Choukei #3) feed

120 x 235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

31
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Standard Multipurpose Two‑sided

550‑sheet feeder printing
tray

Hagaki Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
feed
100 x 148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

B5 Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
feed
176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
(DL) feed

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

32
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Standard Multipurpose Two‑sided

550‑sheet feeder printing
tray

Envelope Short‑edge X ✓1 X
(ISO C4) feed

229 x 324 mm

(9 x 12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
(ISO C5) feed

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9 in.)

Universal N/A ✓2 ✓3, 4 ✓5

1 Supported only when configured from the Universal Setup menu.
2 Supports paper sizes ranging from 95 x 139.7 mm (3.74 x 5.5 in.) to 297 x 355.6 mm
(11.69 x 14 in.).
3The maximum length of the universal paper size in the case of banner paper is 1320.8 x
52 in. Load only one sheet of banner paper at a time.
4 Supports paper sizes ranging from 95 x 139.7 mm (3.74 x 5.5 in.) to 320 x 457.2 mm
(12.6 x 18 in.).
5 Supports paper sizes ranging from 105 x 139.7 mm (4.13 x 5.5 in.) to 320 x 457.2 mm
(12.59 x 18 in.).

Paper sizes supported by the optional trays

Notes

• The Lexmark CX833 and XC8355 printer models do not support the following paper
sizes:
◦ A3 in all paper sources
◦ JIS B4 in all paper sources
◦ Ledger in all paper sources
◦ SRA3 in all paper sources
◦ 12x18 in all paper sources
• The Lexmark CX961, CX962, CX963, XC9635, XC9645, and XC9655 printer
models do not support Envelope (Commercial #9) in the optional 550-sheet trays.

33
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Optional 2x 2000‑sheet 1500‑sheet

550-sheet 550‑sheet tandem tray
tray tray tray

4x6 Card Short‑edge X X X X

feed

Long‑edge X X X X
feed

A6 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
105 x
148 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(4.13 x
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge X X X X
feed

Long‑edge X X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
148 x
210 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
(5.83 x
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
210 x
297 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.27 x
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓1 ✓1 X X
feed
297 x
420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
182 x
257 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(7.17 x
10.1 in.)

34
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Optional 2x 2000‑sheet 1500‑sheet

550-sheet 550‑sheet tandem tray
tray tray tray

JIS B4 Short‑edge ✓1 ✓1 X X
feed
257 x
364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(5.5 x
8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.5 x
11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x
13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x
13.4 in.)

35
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Optional 2x 2000‑sheet 1500‑sheet

550-sheet 550‑sheet tandem tray
tray tray tray

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x
14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓1 ✓1 X X
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge ✓1 ✓1 X X
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x
18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge ✓1 ✓1 X X
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Choukei feed
#3)

120 x
235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
100 x
148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

36
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Optional 2x 2000‑sheet 1500‑sheet

550-sheet 550‑sheet tandem tray
tray tray tray

B5 Short‑edge X X X X
Envelope feed

176 x
250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓2 X X X
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x
9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
(DL) feed

110 x
220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

37
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Optional 2x 2000‑sheet 1500‑sheet

550-sheet 550‑sheet tandem tray
tray tray tray

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(ISO C4) feed

229 x
324 mm

(9 x
12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
(ISO C5) feed

162 x
229 mm

(6.38 x
9 in.)

Universal N/A ✓3 ✓3 ✓ ✓
1 Not supported in the Lexmark CX833 and XC8355 printer models.
2 Not supported in the Lexmark CX961, CX962, CX963, XC9635, XC9645, and XC9655
printer models.
3 Supports paper sizes ranging from 139.7 x 215.9 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.) to 304.8 x 457.2 mm
(12 x 18 in.).

Paper sizes supported by the output bins

Note: Make sure that the paper transport and either of the staple, hole punch
finisher or booklet finisher are installed to the printer.

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

4x6 Card Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓

feed

Long‑edge X X X
feed

38
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

A6 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
105 x 148 mm
Long‑edge X X X
(4.13 x feed
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed

Long‑edge X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
148 x 210 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(5.83 x feed
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
210 x 297 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(8.27 x feed
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x 420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
182 x 257 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(7.17 x feed
10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
257 x 364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

39
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

Statement Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.5 x 11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

40
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

12x18 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x 18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(Choukei #3) feed

120 x 235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge X X ✓
feed
100 x 148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

B5 Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
feed
176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

41
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(DL) feed

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(ISO C4) feed

229 x 324 mm

(9 x 12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(ISO C5) feed

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9 in.)

Universal N/A ✓1 ✓1 ✓2

42
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

4x6 Card Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓

feed

Long‑edge X X X ✓
feed

A6 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
105 x
148 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(4.13 x
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed

Long‑edge X X X ✓
feed

A5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
148 x
210 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(5.83 x
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
210 x
297 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.27 x
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x
420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
182 x
257 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(7.17 x
10.1 in.)

43
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

JIS B4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
257 x
364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(5.5 x
8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(8.5 x
11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x
13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x
13.4 in.)

44
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x
14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x
18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(Choukei feed
#3)

120 x
235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge X X X ✓
feed
100 x
148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

45
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

B5 Short‑edge X X X ✓
Envelope feed

176 x
250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x
9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(DL) feed

110 x
220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

46
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(ISO C4) feed

229 x
324 mm

(9 x
12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(ISO C5) feed

162 x
229 mm

(6.38 x
9 in.)

Universal N/A ✓1 ✓1 ✓3 ✓2
1 Supports paper sizes ranging from 90 x 148 mm (3.55 x 5.83 in.) to 320 x 600 mm (12.59
x 23.62 in.).
2 Supports paper sizes ranging from 90 x 148 mm (3.55 x 5.83 in.) to 320 x 1260 mm
(12.59 x 49.6 in.).
3 Supports paper sizes ranging from 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in.) to 304.8 x 457.2 mm
(12 x 18 in.).

Note: Make sure that the folding paper transport and either of the staple, hole
punch finisher or booklet finisher are installed to the printer.

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch

finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

4x6 Card Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓

feed

Long‑edge X X X
feed

47
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch

finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

A6 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
105 x 148 mm
Long‑edge X X X
(4.13 x feed
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed

Long‑edge X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
148 x 210 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(5.83 x feed
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
210 x 297 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(8.27 x feed
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x 420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
182 x 257 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(7.17 x feed
10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
257 x 364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

48
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch

finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

Statement Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.5 x 11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

49
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch

finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

12x18 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x 18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(Choukei #3) feed

120 x 235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge X X ✓
feed
100 x 148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

B5 Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
feed
176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

50
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch

finisher

Standard bin Bin 1 Bin 2 (Paper

(Finisher top (Finisher transport bin)
bin) stapler/
punch, offset
bin)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(DL) feed

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(ISO C4) feed

229 x 324 mm

(9 x 12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X ✓
(ISO C5) feed

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9 in.)

Universal N/A ✓1 ✓1 ✓2

51
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

4x6 Card Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓

feed

Long‑edge X X X X
feed

A6 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
105 x
148 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(4.13 x
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed

Long‑edge X X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
148 x
210 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(5.83 x
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
210 x
297 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(8.27 x
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x
420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
182 x
257 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(7.17 x
10.1 in.)

52
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

JIS B4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
257 x
364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(5.5 x
8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓
feed
(8.5 x
11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x
13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x
13.4 in.)

53
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x
14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ X
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x
18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X X
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(Choukei feed
#3)

120 x
235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge X X X ✓
feed
100 x
148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

54
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

B5 Short‑edge X X X ✓
Envelope feed

176 x
250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x
9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(DL) feed

110 x
220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

55
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (Finisher (Finisher (Paper
(Finisher stapler/ booklet transport
top bin) punch, bin) bin)
offset bin)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(ISO C4) feed

229 x
324 mm

(9 x
12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X ✓
(ISO C5) feed

162 x
229 mm

(6.38 x
9 in.)

Universal N/A ✓1 ✓1 ✓3 ✓2
1 Supports paper sizes ranging from 90 x 148 mm (3.55 x 5.83 in.) to 320 x 600 mm (12.59
x 23.62 in.).
2 Supports paper sizes ranging from 90 x 148 mm (3.55 x 5.83 in.) to 297 x 1260 mm
(11.69 x 49.6 in.).
3 Supports paper sizes ranging from 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in.) to 304.8 x 457.2 mm
(12 x 18 in.).

Paper sizes supported for staple and punch jobs

Paper sizes supported by the staple finisher

Paper size Orientation Staple

Single Dual Dual Left

4x6 Card Short‑edge X X X

feed

Long‑edge X X X
feed

56
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple

Single Dual Dual Left

A6 Short‑edge X X X
feed
105 x 148 mm
Long‑edge X X X
(4.13 x feed
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge X X X
feed

Long‑edge X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge X X X
feed
148 x 210 mm
Long‑edge X X X
(5.83 x feed
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
210 x 297 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(8.27 x feed
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x 420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
182 x 257 mm
Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
(7.17 x feed
10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
257 x 364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge X X X
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge X X X
feed
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

57
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple

Single Dual Dual Left

Executive Short‑edge ✓ X X
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ X
feed
(8.5 x 11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge X X X
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x 18 in.)

58
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple

Single Dual Dual Left

SRA3 Short‑edge X X X
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X
(Choukei #3) feed

120 x 235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge X X X
feed
100 x 148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

B5 Envelope Short‑edge X X X
feed
176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

59
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple

Single Dual Dual Left

Envelope Short‑edge X X X
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X
(DL) feed

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X
(ISO C4) feed

229 x 324 mm

(9 x 12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X
(ISO C5) feed

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9 in.)

Paper sizes supported by the staple, hole punch finisher

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

4x6 Card Short‑edge X X X X X X

feed

Long‑edge X X X X X X
feed

A6 Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed
105 x
148 mm Long‑edge X X X X X X
feed
(4.13 x
5.83 in.)

60
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

1/3 A4 Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed

Long‑edge X X X X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge X X X ✓ X X
feed
148 x
210 mm Long‑edge X X X ✓ X X
feed
(5.83 x
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
210 x
297 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.27 x
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x
420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
182 x
257 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(7.17 x
10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
257 x
364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge X X X ✓ X X
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge X X X ✓ X X
feed
(5.5 x
8.5 in.)

61
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

Executive Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.5 x
11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x
13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x
13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x
14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

62
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

12x18 Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x
18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(Choukei feed
#3)

120 x
235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed
100 x
148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

B5 Short‑edge X X X X X X
Envelope feed

176 x
250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

63
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x
9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(DL) feed

110 x
220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(ISO C4) feed

229 x
324 mm

(9 x
12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(ISO C5) feed

162 x
229 mm

(6.38 x
9 in.)

64
Learn about the printer

Paper sizes supported by the booklet finisher

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

4x6 Card Short‑edge X X X X X X

feed

Long‑edge X X X X X X
feed

A6 Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed
105 x
148 mm Long‑edge X X X X X X
feed
(4.13 x
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed

Long‑edge X X X X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge X X X ✓ X X
feed
148 x
210 mm Long‑edge X X X ✓ X X
feed
(5.83 x
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
210 x
297 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.27 x
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x
420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ X X X
feed
182 x
257 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
(7.17 x
10.1 in.)

65
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

JIS B4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ X ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
257 x
364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge X X X ✓ X X
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge X X X ✓ X X
feed
(5.5 x
8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
(8.5 x
11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x
13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x
13.4 in.)

66
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X X
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x
14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x
18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(Choukei feed
#3)

120 x
235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge X X X X X X
feed
100 x
148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

67
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

B5 Short‑edge X X X X X X
Envelope feed

176 x
250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x
9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(DL) feed

110 x
220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

68
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Staple Hole punch

Single Dual Dual Two- Three- Four-

Left hole hole hole

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(ISO C4) feed

229 x
324 mm

(9 x
12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X X
(ISO C5) feed

162 x
229 mm

(6.38 x
9 in.)

Paper sizes supported for fold jobs

Paper sizes supported by the folding paper transport

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport only

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Standard bin

4x6 Card Short‑edge X X X X

feed

Long‑edge X X X X
feed

A6 Short‑edge X X X X
feed
105 x
148 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(4.13 x
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge X X X X
feed

Long‑edge X X X X
feed

69
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport only

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Standard bin

A5 Short‑edge X X X X
feed
148 x
210 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(5.83 x
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
210 x
297 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(8.27 x
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x
420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge X X X X
feed
182 x
257 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(7.17 x
10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge X X ✓ ✓
feed
257 x
364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge X X X X
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(5.5 x
8.5 in.)

70
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport only

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Standard bin

Executive Short‑edge X X X X
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(8.5 x
11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge X X X X
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x
13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x
13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x
14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

71
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport only

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Standard bin

12x18 Short‑edge X X X X
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x
18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge X X X X
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Choukei feed
#3)

120 x
235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge X X X X
feed
100 x
148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

B5 Short‑edge X X X X
Envelope feed

176 x
250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

72
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport only

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Standard bin

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x
9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(DL) feed

110 x
220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(ISO C4) feed

229 x
324 mm

(9 x
12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(ISO C5) feed

162 x
229 mm

(6.38 x
9 in.)

73
Learn about the printer

Paper sizes supported by the paper transport and booklet finisher

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Booklet finisher

V-fold multiple V-fold

Bin 2 Standard bin, bin

1, bin 2

4x6 Card Short‑edge feed X X

Long‑edge feed X X

A6 Short‑edge feed X X

105 x 148 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(4.13 x 5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge feed X X

Long‑edge feed X X

A5 Short‑edge feed X X

148 x 210 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(5.83 x 8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

210 x 297 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(8.27 x 11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

297 x 420 mm

(11.69 x 16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

182 x 257 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(7.17 x 10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

257 x 364 mm

(10.12 x 14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge feed X X

139.7 x 215.9 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

74
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Booklet finisher

V-fold multiple V-fold

Bin 2 Standard bin, bin

1, bin 2

Executive Short‑edge feed X X

184.2 x 266.7 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(7.25 x 10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 279.4 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(8.5 x 11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Oficio (Mexico) Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

279.4 x 431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

304.8 x 457.2 mm

(12 x 18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x 17.7 in.)

75
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Booklet finisher

V-fold multiple V-fold

Bin 2 Standard bin, bin

1, bin 2

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Choukei #3)

120 x 235 mm

(4.75 x 9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge feed X X

100 x 148 mm

(3.94 x 5.83 in.)

B5 Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x 9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Commercial #9)

98.4 x 225.4 mm

(3.875 x 8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Commercial #10)

104.8 x 241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Monarch 7‑3/4)

98.4 x 190.5 mm

(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

Envelope (DL) Short‑edge feed X X

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x 8.66 in.)

Envelope (ISO C4) Short‑edge feed X X

229 x 324 mm

(9 x 12.8 in.)

76
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Booklet finisher

V-fold multiple V-fold

Bin 2 Standard bin, bin

1, bin 2

Envelope (ISO C5) Short‑edge feed X X

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9 in.)

Paper sizes supported by the folding paper transport and staple, hole
punch finisher

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Bin 2 Standard bin, bin 2

4x6 Card Short‑edge X X X X

feed

Long‑edge X X X X
feed

A6 Short‑edge X X X X
feed
105 x
148 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(4.13 x
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge X X X X
feed

Long‑edge X X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge X X X X
feed
148 x
210 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(5.83 x
8.27 in.)

77
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Bin 2 Standard bin, bin 2

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
210 x
297 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(8.27 x
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x
420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge X X X X
feed
182 x
257 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(7.17 x
10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge X X ✓ ✓
feed
257 x
364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge X X X X
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(5.5 x
8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge X X X X
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

78
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Bin 2 Standard bin, bin 2

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge X X X X
feed
(8.5 x
11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge X X X X
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x
13 in.)

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x
13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x
14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge X X X ✓
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x
18 in.)

79
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Bin 2 Standard bin, bin 2

SRA3 Short‑edge X X X ✓
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Choukei feed
#3)

120 x
235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge X X X X
feed
100 x
148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

B5 Short‑edge X X X X
Envelope feed

176 x
250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

80
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Staple, hole punch finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold half V-fold

sheet

Bin 2 Standard bin, bin 2

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x
9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(DL) feed

110 x
220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(ISO C4) feed

229 x
324 mm

(9 x
12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X
(ISO C5) feed

162 x
229 mm

(6.38 x
9 in.)

81
Learn about the printer

Paper sizes supported by the folding paper transport and booklet

finisher

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold V-fold V-fold

half multiple
sheet

Bin 3 Bin 3 Standard Bin 2 Standard

bin, bin bin, bin
1, bin 3 1, bin
2, bin 3

4x6 Card Short‑edge X X X X X

feed

Long‑edge X X X X X
feed

A6 Short‑edge X X X X X
feed
105 x
148 mm Long‑edge X X X X X
feed
(4.13 x
5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge X X X X X
feed

Long‑edge X X X X X
feed

A5 Short‑edge X X X X X
feed
148 x
210 mm Long‑edge X X X X X
feed
(5.83 x
8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
210 x
297 mm Long‑edge X X X X X
feed
(8.27 x
11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
297 x
420 mm

(11.69 x
16.54 in.)

82
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold V-fold V-fold

half multiple
sheet

Bin 3 Bin 3 Standard Bin 2 Standard

bin, bin bin, bin
1, bin 3 1, bin
2, bin 3

JIS B5 Short‑edge X X X ✓ ✓
feed
182 x
257 mm Long‑edge X X X X X
feed
(7.17 x
10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge X X ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
257 x
364 mm

(10.12 x
14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge X X X X X
feed
139.7 x
215.9 mm Long‑edge X X X X X
feed
(5.5 x
8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge X X X X X
feed
184.2 x
266.7 mm Long‑edge X X X X X
feed
(7.25 x
10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
279.4 mm Long‑edge X X X X X
feed
(8.5 x 11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge X X X ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
330.2 mm

(8.5 x
13 in.)

83
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold V-fold V-fold

half multiple
sheet

Bin 3 Bin 3 Standard Bin 2 Standard

bin, bin bin, bin
1, bin 3 1, bin
2, bin 3

Oficio Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(Mexico) feed

215.9 x
340.4 mm

(8.5 x
13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
215.9 x
355.6 mm

(8.5 x
14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
feed
279.4 x
431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge X X X X ✓
feed
304.8 x
457.2 mm

(12 x 18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge X X X X ✓
feed
320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x
17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X
(Choukei feed
#3)

120 x
235 mm

(4.75 x
9.25 in.)

84
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold V-fold V-fold

half multiple
sheet

Bin 3 Bin 3 Standard Bin 2 Standard

bin, bin bin, bin
1, bin 3 1, bin
2, bin 3

Hagaki Short‑edge X X X X X
feed
100 x
148 mm

(3.94 x
5.83 in.)

B5 Short‑edge X X X X X
Envelope feed

176 x
250 mm

(6.93 x
9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X
(Commercial feed
#9)

98.4 x
225.4 mm

(3.875 x
8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X
(Commercial feed
#10)

104.8 x
241.3 mm

(4.12 x
9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X
(Monarch feed
7‑3/4)

98.4 x
190.5 mm

(3.875 x
7.5 in.)

85
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper transport + Booklet finisher

C-fold Z-fold Z-fold V-fold V-fold

half multiple
sheet

Bin 3 Bin 3 Standard Bin 2 Standard

bin, bin bin, bin
1, bin 3 1, bin
2, bin 3

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X
(DL) feed

110 x
220 mm

(4.33 x
8.66 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X
(ISO C4) feed

229 x
324 mm

(9 x
12.8 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge X X X X X
(ISO C5) feed

162 x
229 mm

(6.38 x
9 in.)

Paper sizes supported for offset stacking jobs

Paper sizes supported by the offset stacker or staple finisher

Paper size Orientation Offset stacker Staple finisher

4x6 Card Short‑edge feed X X

Long‑edge feed X X

A6 Short‑edge feed X X

105 x 148 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(4.13 x 5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge feed X X

86
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Offset stacker Staple finisher

Long‑edge feed X X

A5 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

148 x 210 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(5.83 x 8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

210 x 297 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(8.27 x 11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

297 x 420 mm

(11.69 x 16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

182 x 257 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(7.17 x 10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

257 x 364 mm

(10.12 x 14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge feed ✓ X

139.7 x 215.9 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ X

(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

184.2 x 266.7 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(7.25 x 10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 279.4 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(8.5 x 11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

87
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Offset stacker Staple finisher

Oficio (Mexico) Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

279.4 x 431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge feed X X

304.8 x 457.2 mm

(12 x 18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge feed X X

320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x 17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed ✓ X

(Choukei #3)

120 x 235 mm

(4.75 x 9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge feed ✓ X

100 x 148 mm

(3.94 x 5.83 in.)

B5 Envelope Short‑edge feed ✓ X

176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x 9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed ✓ X

(Commercial #9)

98.4 x 225.4 mm

(3.875 x 8.9 in.)

88
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Offset stacker Staple finisher

Envelope Short‑edge feed ✓ X

(Commercial #10)

104.8 x 241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed ✓ X

(Monarch 7‑3/4)

98.4 x 190.5 mm

(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

Envelope (DL) Short‑edge feed ✓ X

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x 8.66 in.)

Envelope (ISO C4) Short‑edge feed ✓ X

229 x 324 mm

(9 x 12.8 in.)

Envelope (ISO C5) Short‑edge feed ✓ X

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9 in.)

Universal N/A ✓1 ✓2
1 Supports paper sizes ranging from 90 x 148 mm (3.55 x 5.83 in.) to 320 x 600 mm (12.59
x 23.62 in.).
2 Supports paper sizes ranging from 148 x 148 mm (5.83 x 5.83 in.) to 297 x 431.8 mm
(11.69 x 17 in.).

Paper sizes supported by the output bins

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Paper transport +

Staple, hole Booklet finisher
punch finisher

Bin 1

4x6 Card Short‑edge feed X X

Long‑edge feed X X

89
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Paper transport +

Staple, hole Booklet finisher
punch finisher

Bin 1

A6 Short‑edge feed X X

105 x 148 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(4.13 x 5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge feed X X

Long‑edge feed X X

A5 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

148 x 210 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(5.83 x 8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

210 x 297 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(8.27 x 11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

297 x 420 mm

(11.69 x 16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

182 x 257 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(7.17 x 10.1 in.)

JIS B4 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

257 x 364 mm

(10.12 x 14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

139.7 x 215.9 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

184.2 x 266.7 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(7.25 x 10.5 in.)

90
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Paper transport +

Staple, hole Booklet finisher
punch finisher

Bin 1

Letter Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 279.4 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(8.5 x 11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Oficio (Mexico) Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

279.4 x 431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

304.8 x 457.2 mm

(12 x 18 in.)

SRA3 Short‑edge feed X X

320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x 17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Choukei #3)

120 x 235 mm

(4.75 x 9.25 in.)

91
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Paper transport + Paper transport +

Staple, hole Booklet finisher
punch finisher

Bin 1

Hagaki Short‑edge feed X X

100 x 148 mm

(3.94 x 5.83 in.)

B5 Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x 9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Commercial #9)

98.4 x 225.4 mm

(3.875 x 8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Commercial #10)

104.8 x 241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Monarch 7‑3/4)

98.4 x 190.5 mm

(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

Envelope (DL) Short‑edge feed X X

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x 8.66 in.)

Envelope (ISO C4) Short‑edge feed X X

229 x 324 mm

(9 x 12.8 in.)

Envelope (ISO C5) Short‑edge feed X X

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9 in.)

Universal N/A ✓1 ✓2

92
Learn about the printer

1 Supports paper sizes ranging from 139.7 x 148 mm (5.5 x 5.83 in.) to 304.8 x 600 mm
(12 x 23.62 in.).
2 Supports paper sizes ranging from 125 x 148 mm (4.93 x 5.83 in.) to 304.8 x 457.2 mm
(12 x 18 in.).

Paper sizes supported by the output bins (with folding paper transport)

Paper size Orientation Folding paper Folding paper

transport + Staple, transport +
hole punch Booklet finisher
finisher

Bin 1

4x6 Card Short‑edge feed X X

Long‑edge feed X X

A6 Short‑edge feed X X

105 x 148 mm Long‑edge feed X X

(4.13 x 5.83 in.)

1/3 A4 Short‑edge feed X X

Long‑edge feed X X

A5 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

148 x 210 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(5.83 x 8.27 in.)

A4 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

210 x 297 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(8.27 x 11.7 in.)

A3 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

297 x 420 mm

(11.69 x 16.54 in.)

JIS B5 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

182 x 257 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(7.17 x 10.1 in.)

93
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper Folding paper

transport + Staple, transport +
hole punch Booklet finisher
finisher

Bin 1

JIS B4 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

257 x 364 mm

(10.12 x 14.33 in.)

Statement Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

139.7 x 215.9 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Executive Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

184.2 x 266.7 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(7.25 x 10.5 in.)

Letter Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 279.4 mm Long‑edge feed ✓ ✓

(8.5 x 11 in.)

Folio Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Oficio (Mexico) Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Legal Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Ledger Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

279.4 x 431.8 mm

(11 x 17 in.)

12x18 Short‑edge feed ✓ ✓

304.8 x 457.2 mm

(12 x 18 in.)

94
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper Folding paper

transport + Staple, transport +
hole punch Booklet finisher
finisher

Bin 1

SRA3 Short‑edge feed X X

320.04 x
449.58 mm

(12.6 x 17.7 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Choukei #3)

120 x 235 mm

(4.75 x 9.25 in.)

Hagaki Short‑edge feed X X

100 x 148 mm

(3.94 x 5.83 in.)

B5 Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x 9.84 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Commercial #9)

98.4 x 225.4 mm

(3.875 x 8.9 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Commercial #10)

104.8 x 241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

Envelope Short‑edge feed X X

(Monarch 7‑3/4)

98.4 x 190.5 mm

(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

Envelope (DL) Short‑edge feed X X

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x 8.66 in.)

95
Learn about the printer

Paper size Orientation Folding paper Folding paper

transport + Staple, transport +
hole punch Booklet finisher
finisher

Bin 1

Envelope (ISO C4) Short‑edge feed X X

229 x 324 mm

(9 x 12.8 in.)

Envelope (ISO C5) Short‑edge feed X X

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9 in.)

Universal N/A ✓1 ✓2
1 Supports paper sizes ranging from 139.7 x 148 mm (5.5 x 5.83 in.) to 304.8 x 600 mm
(12 x 23.62 in.).
2 Supports paper sizes ranging from 125 x 148 mm (4.93 x 5.83 in.) to 304.8 x 457.2 mm
(12 x 18 in.).

Supported paper weights

Standard or optional Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided printing

550‑sheet tray, 2 x 550-
sheet tray, 1500‑sheet
tray, and 2000-sheet
tandem tray

60–300 g/m2 60–300 g/m2 60–220 g/m2

(16–80‑lb bond) (16–80‑lb bond) (16–59‑lb bond)

Supported paper types

Paper size Standard Multipurpose Two‑sided printing

550‑sheet tray feeder

Plain paper ✓ ✓ ✓

Card stock ✓ ✓ ✓

Transparencies x x x

Recycled ✓ ✓ ✓

Glossy ✓ ✓ ✓

Heavy glossy ✓ ✓ ✓

96
Learn about the printer

Paper size Standard Multipurpose Two‑sided printing

550‑sheet tray feeder

Labels ✓ ✓ x

Vinyl labels ✓ ✓ x

Bond ✓ ✓ ✓

Envelope ✓ ✓ x

Rough envelope ✓ ✓ x

Letterhead ✓ ✓ ✓

Preprinted ✓ ✓ ✓

Colored paper ✓ ✓ ✓

Light paper ✓ ✓ ✓

Heavy paper ✓ ✓ ✓

Rough cotton ✓ ✓ ✓

Custom type ✓ ✓ ✓

Paper size Optional 550- 2 x 550‑sheet 2000‑sheet 1500‑sheet

sheet tray tray tandem tray tray

Plain paper ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Card stock ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Transparencies x x x x

Recycled ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Glossy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Heavy glossy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Labels ✓ ✓ x x

Vinyl labels ✓ ✓ x x

Bond ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Envelope ✓ ✓ x x

Rough ✓ ✓ x x
envelope

Letterhead ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Preprinted ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Colored ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
paper

97
Learn about the printer

Paper size Optional 550- 2 x 550‑sheet 2000‑sheet 1500‑sheet

sheet tray tray tandem tray tray

Light paper ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Heavy paper ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Rough cotton ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Custom type ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Paper Paper transport + staple, hole Paper transport + booklet finisher

size punch finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (staple, (paper bin (staple, (finisher (paper
(finisher hole transport (finisher hole booklet transport
top bin punch bin) top punch bin) bin)
finisher, bin) finisher,
offset offset
bin) bin)

Plain ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓
paper

Card ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x ✓
stock

Recycled ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓

Glossy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓

Heavy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x ✓
glossy

Labels ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x x

Vinyl ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x x
labels

Bond ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓

Envelope x x ✓ x x x ✓

Rough x x ✓ x x x ✓
envelope

Letterhead ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓

Preprinted ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓

Colored ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓
paper

Light ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓
paper

98
Learn about the printer

Paper Paper transport + staple, hole Paper transport + booklet finisher

size punch finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (staple, (paper bin (staple, (finisher (paper
(finisher hole transport (finisher hole booklet transport
top bin punch bin) top punch bin) bin)
finisher, bin) finisher,
offset offset
bin) bin)

Heavy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x x
paper

Rough ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x x
cotton

Custom ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓
type
*The maximum length of the universal paper size in the case of banner paper is 1320.8 x
52 in. Load only one sheet of banner paper at a time.
Paper Paper Transport with folding Paper transport with folding option +
size option + staple, hole punch booklet finisher
finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (staple, (paper bin (staple, (finisher (paper
(finisher hole transport (finisher hole booklet transport
top bin punch bin) top punch bin) bin)
finisher, bin) finisher,
offset offset
bin) bin)

Plain ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
paper

Card ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x ✓
stock

Recycled ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Glossy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Heavy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x ✓
glossy

Labels ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x ✓

Vinyl ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x ✓
labels

Bond ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Envelope x x ✓ x x x ✓

Rough x x ✓ x x x ✓
envelope

Letterhead ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x ✓

99
Learn about the printer

Paper Paper Transport with folding Paper transport with folding option +
size option + staple, hole punch booklet finisher
finisher

Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Standard Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3

bin (staple, (paper bin (staple, (finisher (paper
(finisher hole transport (finisher hole booklet transport
top bin punch bin) top punch bin) bin)
finisher, bin) finisher,
offset offset
bin) bin)

Preprinted ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x ✓

Colored ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
paper

Light ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
paper

Heavy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x x
paper

Rough ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ x x
cotton

Custom ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓* ✓
type
*The maximum length of the universal paper size in the case of banner paper is 1320.8 x
52 in. Load only one sheet of banner paper at a time.
Paper size Paper transport Offset stacker Staple finisher
with folding
option only

Plain paper ✓ ✓ ✓

Card stock ✓ ✓ ✓

Recycled ✓ ✓ ✓

Glossy ✓ ✓ ✓

Heavy glossy ✓ ✓ ✓

Labels ✓ ✓ ✓

Vinyl labels ✓ ✓ ✓

Bond ✓ ✓ ✓

Envelope ✓ ✓ ✓

Rough envelope ✓ ✓ ✓

Letterhead ✓ ✓ ✓

Preprinted ✓ ✓ ✓

100
Learn about the printer

Paper size Paper transport Offset stacker Staple finisher

with folding
option only

Colored paper ✓ ✓ ✓

Light paper ✓ ✓ ✓

Heavy paper ✓ ✓ ✓

Rough cotton ✓ ✓ ✓

Custom type ✓ ✓ ✓

Paper Finisher top bin (standard bin) Finisher stapler bin (bin 1)
size
Offset Hole Staple Fold Offset Hole Staple Fold
punch punch

Plain x ✓ x ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
paper

Card x x x x ✓ x x x
stock

Transparencies
x x x x x x x x

Recycled x ✓ x ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Glossy x ✓ x ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Heavy x x x x ✓ x x x
glossy

Labels x x x x ✓ x x x

Vinyl x x x x ✓ x x x
labels

Bond x ✓ x ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Letterhead x ✓ x ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Preprinted x ✓ x ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Colored x ✓ x ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
paper

Light x ✓ x ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
paper

Heavy x x x x ✓ x x x
paper

Rough x ✓ x x ✓ ✓ x x
cotton

Custom x ✓ x ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
type

101
Learn about the printer

Additional printer features and support

Supported applications
• Display Customization

Supported flash drives and file types

Flash drives

• Flash drives that support USB 2.0 or lower.

• Flash drives that support a New Technology File System (NTFS) or the File Allocation Table
(FAT32) file system.

File types

Documents Images

• PDF (version 1.7 or earlier) • JPEG or JPG

• Microsoft file formats (DOC, DOCX, • TIFF or TIF
XLS, XLSX, PPT, PPTX) • GIF
• BMP
• PNG
• PCX
• DCX

Available internal options

• Intelligent storage drive (ISD)

◦ Fonts

▪ Simplified Chinese
▪ Traditional Chinese
▪ Japanese
▪ Korean
▪ Arabic
◦ Mass storage
• Hard disk
• Licensed features

◦ IPDS
◦ Bar Code
• Lexmark™ Internal solutions port (ISP)

◦ RS‑232C Serial Card

◦ MarkNet™ N8230 Fiber Ethernet 100BASE-FX(LC), 1000BASE-SX(LC)

102
Learn about the printer

Note: An ISD or a hard disk is required to activate Forms Merge and some IPDS
features.

103
Set up, install, and configure

Set up, install, and configure

Selecting a location for the printer
• Leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors and to install hardware options.
• Set up the printer near an electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product near
water or wet locations.

• Make sure that airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or
the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:

◦ Clean, dry, and free of dust.

◦ Away from stray staples and paper clips.
◦ Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
◦ Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:

Ambient temperature 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F)

Storage temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)

• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

104
Set up, install, and configure

1 Top 305 mm (12 in.)

2 Rear 203 mm (8 in.)

3 Right side 574 mm (22.6 in)

4 Front 338 mm (13.3 in)

5 Left side 152 mm (6 in)

Printer ports

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make any
electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or
telephone, during a lightning storm.

105
Set up, install, and configure

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

Warning—Potential Damage
To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the USB cable, any
wireless network adapter, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing.

Printer port Function

1 Finisher or option port Connect the printer to a

finisher or an option.

2 USB port Attach a keyboard or

any compatible option.

3 USB printer port Connect the printer to a

computer.

106
Set up, install, and configure

Printer port Function

4 Ethernet port Connect the printer to a

network.

5 Power cord socket Connect the printer to a

properly grounded
electrical outlet.

Configuring apps and solutions

Using Display Customization

Note: Make sure that the Screen Saver, Slideshow, and Wallpaper settings are
enabled from the Embedded Web Server. Navigate to Apps > Display
Customization > Configure.

Managing screen saver and slide show images

1. In the Screen Saver and Slideshow Images section, add, edit, or delete an image.

Notes
◦ You can add up to 10 images.
◦ When enabled, the status icons appear on the screen saver only when there
are errors, warnings, or cloud‑based notifications.

2. Apply the changes.

Changing the wallpaper image

1. From the control panel, select Change Wallpaper.

2. Select an image to use.
3. Apply the changes.

Running a slide show from a flash drive

1. Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

2. From the control panel, select Slideshow.

Note: You can remove the flash drive after the slide show starts, but the images
are not stored in the printer. If the slide show stops, then insert the flash drive again
to view the images.

107
Set up, install, and configure

Configuring bookmarks
Creating bookmarks

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Bookmarks > Add Bookmark, and then type a bookmark name.
3. Select an Address protocol type, and then do one of the following:

◦ For HTTP and HTTPS, type the URL that you want to bookmark.
◦ For HTTPS, make sure to use the host name instead of the IP address. For example,
type myWebsite.com/sample.pdf instead of typing 123.123.123.123/sample.pdf.
Make sure that the host name also matches the Common Name (CN) value in the
server certificate. For more information on obtaining the CN value in the server
certificate, see the help information for your web browser.
◦ For FTP, type the FTP address. For example, myServer/myDirectory. Enter the FTP
port number. Port 21 is the default port for sending commands.
◦ For SMB, type the network folder address. For example, myServer/myShare/
myFile.pdf. Type the network domain name.
◦ If necessary, select the Authentication type for FTP and SMB.

To limit access to the bookmark, enter a PIN.

Note: The application supports the following file types: PDF, JPEG, and TIFF. Other
file types such as DOCX and XLSX are supported in some printer models.

4. Click Save.

Creating folders

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Bookmarks > Add Folder, and then type a folder name.

108
Set up, install, and configure

Note: To limit access to the folder, enter a PIN.

3. Click Save.

Configuring Address Book

Adding contacts

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Address Book, and then click Add Contact.

3. If necessary, specify a login method to allow application access.
4. Click Save.

Adding groups

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Address Book, and then click Add Contact.

Note: You can assign one or more contacts to the group.

3. Click Save.

Setting up and using the accessibility features

Activating Voice Guidance
From the home screen

109
Set up, install, and configure

1. In one motion and using one finger, slowly swipe left then up on the display until you hear a
voice message.
2. Using two fingers, select OK.

Note: If the gesture does not work, then apply more pressure.

From the keyboard

1. Press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.
2. Press Tab to navigate the focus cursor to the OK button, and then press Enter.

Notes

• When Voice Guidance is activated, always use two fingers to select any item on the
display.
• Voice Guidance has limited language support.

Deactivating Voice Guidance

1. In one motion and using one finger, slowly swipe left then up on the display until you hear a
voice message.
2. Using two fingers, do either of the following:

◦ Select Voice Guidance, and then select OK.

◦ Select Cancel.

Note: If the gesture does not work, then apply more pressure.

Pressing the power button or putting the printer in Sleep or Hibernate mode also
deactivates Voice Guidance.

Navigating the screen using gestures

Notes

• Most of the gestures are applicable only when Voice Guidance is activated.
• Use a physical keyboard to type characters and adjust certain settings.

110
Set up, install, and configure

Gesture Function

Swipe left then up using one finger Launch or exit Accessibility mode.

Note: This gesture is also applicable

when the printer is in normal mode.

Double‑tap using one finger Select an option or item on the screen.

Double‑tap the home icon using two fingers Deactivate the Accessibility mode.

111
Set up, install, and configure

Gesture Function

Triple‑tap using one finger Zoom in or zoom out text and images.

Note: Enable Magnification mode

to use the zoom feature.

Swipe right or swipe down using one finger Move to the next item on the screen.

112
Set up, install, and configure

Gesture Function

Swipe left or swipe up using one finger Move to the previous item on the screen.

Swipe up then down using one finger Move to the first item on the screen.

113
Set up, install, and configure

Gesture Function

Pan Access parts of the zoomed image that are

beyond the limit of the screen.

Notes
• Use two fingers to drag a
zoomed image.
• Enable Magnification mode
to use the pan gesture.

Swipe up then right using one finger Increase the volume.

Note: This gesture is also applicable

when the printer is in normal mode.

Swipe down then right using one finger Decrease the volume.

Note: This gesture is also applicable

when the printer is in normal mode.

114
Set up, install, and configure

Gesture Function

Swipe up then left using one finger Exit an application and return to the home
screen.

Swipe down then left using one finger Go back to the previous setting.

Using the on‑screen keyboard

When the on‑screen keyboard appears, do one or more of the following:

• Touch a key to announce and type the character in the field.

• Drag a finger across different characters to announce and type the character in the field.
• Touch a text box using two fingers to announce the characters in the field.
• Touch Backspace to delete characters.

Enabling Magnification mode

1. In one motion and using one finger, slowly swipe left then up on the display until you hear a
voice message.

115
Set up, install, and configure

Note: For printer models without built-in speakers, use headphones to hear the
message.

2. Using two fingers, do the following:

Note: If the gesture does not work, then apply more pressure.

a. Touch Magnification mode.

b. Touch OK.

Note: If the gesture does not work, then apply more pressure.

For more information on navigating a magnified screen, see Navigating the screen using
gestures on page 110.

Adjusting the Voice Guidance speech rate

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Accessibility > Speech Rate.
2. Select the speech rate.

Adjusting the default headphone volume

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Accessibility.
2. Adjust the headphone volume.

Note: The volume resets to the default value after the user exits Accessibility mode
or when the printer wakes from Sleep or Hibernate mode.

Adjusting the default internal speaker volume

1. From the control panel, swipe right to the control center.
2. Adjust the volume.

116
Set up, install, and configure

Notes

• If Quiet Mode is enabled, then the audible alerts are turned off. This setting also
slows the printer performance.
• The volume resets to the default value after the user exits the Accessibility mode or
when the printer wakes from Sleep or Hibernate mode.

Enabling spoken passwords or personal identification

numbers
1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Accessibility > Speak
Passwords/PINs.
2. Enable the setting.

Loading paper and specialty media

Setting the size and type of the specialty media
For specialty media like labels, card stock, or envelopes, do the following:

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/
Type.
2. Select a paper source, and then set the size and type of the specialty media.

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal Setup menu lets you set the width and height of a paper size that is not
preset in the printer.

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Paper > Media Configuration > Universal
Setup.
2. Select All Input Trays, and then configure the settings for the paper size that you want to
customize.

Loading the 550-sheet tray

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD
To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep
all other trays closed until needed.

117
Set up, install, and configure

1. Open the tray.

Note: To avoid jams, do not open trays while the printer is busy.

2. Adjust the guides to match the size of the paper that you are loading.

Notes
◦ Use the indicators on the bottom of the tray to position the guides.
◦ Prepunched paper is supported only in the standard 550-sheet tray.
◦ A3-size paper is supported only in the optional 550-sheet tray.

118
Set up, install, and configure

3. Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

4. Load the paper stack with the printable side faceup.

Notes
◦ Do not slide paper into the tray.
◦ Make sure that the side guides fit snugly against the paper.
◦ Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Overfilling may cause paper jams.

119
Set up, install, and configure

5. Insert the tray.

If necessary, set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: When a finisher is installed, the pages are rotated to 180° when printed.

When loading letterhead, do any of the following:

Without an optional finisher With an optional finisher

One‑sided, long‑edge printing One‑sided, long‑edge printing

120
Set up, install, and configure

Without an optional finisher With an optional finisher

One‑sided, short‑edge printing One‑sided, short‑edge printing

Two‑sided, long‑edge printing Two‑sided, long‑edge printing

Two‑sided, short‑edge printing Two‑sided, short‑edge printing

When loading prepunched paper, do any of the following:

Without an optional finisher With an optional finisher

One‑sided, long‑edge printing One‑sided, long‑edge printing

One‑sided, short‑edge printing One‑sided, short‑edge printing

121
Set up, install, and configure

Without an optional finisher With an optional finisher

Two‑sided, long‑edge printing Two‑sided, long‑edge printing

Two‑sided, short‑edge printing Two‑sided, short‑edge printing

Loading the 2000-sheet tandem tray

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD
To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep
all other trays closed until needed.

1. Open the tray.

Note: To avoid jams, do not pull out trays while the printer is busy.

122
Set up, install, and configure

2. Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

3. Load the paper stack to the right tray insert with the printable side faceup.

Notes
◦ Do not slide paper into the tray.
◦ Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Overfilling may cause paper jams.

123
Set up, install, and configure

4. Insert the right tray insert into the printer.

5. Load the paper stack to the left tray insert with the printable side faceup.

6. Insert the tray.

If necessary, set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.

124
Set up, install, and configure

Note: When a finisher is installed, the pages are rotated to 180° when printed.

When loading letterhead for one-sided printing, load it faceup with the header toward the
front of the tray.

When loading letterhead for two-sided printing, load it facedown with the header toward
the front of the tray.

125
Set up, install, and configure

Loading the 1500-sheet tray

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD
To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep
all other trays closed until needed.

1. Open door K.

Note: To avoid jams, do not open trays while the printer is busy.

2. Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

3. Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.

Notes
◦ Do not slide paper into the tray.
◦ Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Overfilling may cause paper jams.

126
Set up, install, and configure

4. Close door K.

If necessary, set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.

When loading letterhead for one-sided printing, load it facedown with the header toward
the rear of the printer.

127
Set up, install, and configure

When loading letterhead for two-sided printing, load it faceup with the header toward the
rear of the printer.

When loading a different paper size, make sure to adjust the guides. Do the following:

1. Using a flat‑head screwdriver, remove the screws from the paper guides.

2. Remove the paper guides.

128
Set up, install, and configure

3. Align the paper guides to match the size of the paper that you are loading.

129
Set up, install, and configure

4. Install the screws on the paper guides.

130
Set up, install, and configure

Loading the multipurpose feeder

1. Open the multipurpose feeder.

131
Set up, install, and configure

2. Adjust the side guides to match the size of the paper that you are loading.

3. Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

132
Set up, install, and configure

4. Load the paper.

Note: Make sure that the side guides fit snugly against the paper.

◦ When loading letterhead, do either of the following:

Without a finisher With a finisher

One‑sided, long‑edge printing One‑sided, long‑edge printing

Two‑sided, long‑edge printing Two‑sided, long‑edge printing

◦ When loading prepunched paper, do either of the following:

Without a finisher With a finisher

One‑sided, long‑edge printing One‑sided, long‑edge printing

133
Set up, install, and configure

Without a finisher With a finisher

Two‑sided, long‑edge printing Two‑sided, long‑edge printing

For envelopes

Load envelope with the flap faceup toward the rear of the printer. Load European envelope
with the flap faceup entering the multipurpose feeder first.

134
Set up, install, and configure

Note: When a finisher is installed, the pages are rotated to 180° when printed.

Linking trays
1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

135
Set up, install, and configure

Notes
◦ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration.

3. Set the same paper size and paper type for the trays that you are linking.

Note: Make sure to load the linked trays with the same paper orientation.

4. Save the settings.

5. Click Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Tray Configuration.
6. Set Tray Linking to Automatic.
7. Save the settings.

To unlink the trays, make sure that no trays have the same paper size and paper type
settings.

Warning—Potential Damage
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. To avoid
printing issues, match the paper type setting in the printer with the paper loaded in
the tray.

Installing and updating software, drivers, and

firmware
Installing the printer software

Notes

• The print driver is included in the software installer package.

• For Macintosh computers with macOS version 10.7 or later, you do not need to
install the driver to print on an AirPrint-certified printer. If you want custom printing
features, then download the print driver.

1. Obtain a copy of the software installer package.

◦ From the software CD that came with your printer.

◦ Go to www.lexmark.com/downloads.
2. Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

136
Set up, install, and configure

Adding printers to a computer

Before you begin, do one of the following:

• Connect the printer and the computer to the same network. For more information on
connecting the printer to a network, see Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network on page
362.
• Connect the computer to the printer. For more information, see Connecting a computer to the
printer on page 365.
• Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable. For more information, see Printer
ports on page 105.

Note: The USB cable is sold separately.

For Windows users

1. Install the print driver on the computer.

Note: For more information, see Installing the printer software on page 136.

2. Open Printers & scanners, and then click Add a printer or scanner.
3. Depending on your printer connection, do one of the following:

◦ Select a printer from the list, and then click Add device.
◦ Click Show Wi‑Fi Direct printers, select a printer, and then click Add device.
◦ Click The printer that I want isn’t listed, and then from the Add Printer window, do
the following:

1. Select Add a printer using an IP address or hostname, and then click Next.
2. In the Device type field, select TCP/IP Device.
3. In the Hostname or IP address field, type the printer IP address, and then click
Next.

Notes
▪ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
▪ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load
the web page correctly.

4. Select a print driver, and then click Next.

5. Select Use the driver that is currently installed (recommended), and then
click Next.
6. Type a printer name, and then click Next.
7. Click Finish.

For Macintosh users

1. Open Printers & Scanners.

2. Click Add Printer, Scanner, or Fax, and then select a printer.

137
Set up, install, and configure

3. From the Add Printer menu, select a print driver.

Notes
◦ To use the Macintosh print driver, select either AirPrint or Secure AirPrint.
◦ If you want custom printing features, then select the Lexmark print driver. To
install the driver, see Installing the printer software on page 136.

4. Add the printer.

Exporting a configuration file

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. From the Embedded Web Server, click Export Configuration.

3. Select a configuration to export.

Note: Depending on the configuration that you selected, the files are either
exported in a ZIP or CSV format.

Importing a configuration file

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. From the Embedded Web Server, click Import Configuration.

3. Browse to the location that the file is saved.

138
Set up, install, and configure

Note: The files are either saved in a ZIP or CSV format.

4. Click Import.

Adding available options in the print driver

For Windows users

1. Open the printers folder.

2. Select the printer that you want to update, and then do either of the following:

◦ For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.

◦ For earlier versions, select Properties.
3. Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4. Apply the changes.

For Macintosh users

1. Open Printers & Scanners.

2. Click Add Printer, Scanner, or Fax, and then select a printer.
3. Choose a print driver.
4. Apply the changes.

Printer firmware instructions

Checking the printer firmware version

Using the Embedded Web Server

Note: Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. For
example, 123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Reports › Device › Device Information.

139
Set up, install, and configure

3. Look for Base.

Note: The firmware version appears as sets of letters and numbers separated by
periods. For example, ABCDE.123.123.

Using the control panel

1. Navigate to Settings › Device › About this printer.

2. Look for Firmware Version.

Note: The firmware version appears as sets of letters and numbers separated by
periods. For example, ABCDE.123.123.

Downloading the printer firmware

1. Go to the drivers and downloads page.

2. Type the printer model, and then click Find Drivers & Downloads.
3. In the Recommended Firmware section, click the zip file.
4. Accept the End-User License Agreement, and then start the download.

Note: You can save the file either to your computer or flash drive.

5. After downloading the firmware, extract the zip file, and then locate the firmware flash file
(.fls).

Updating firmware

Updating the firmware using the control panel

Using the notification center

Note: This method is applicable only in some printer models.

1. From the home screen, navigate to the notification center, and then select Firmware update
available.

140
Set up, install, and configure

2. Select Install now.

The printer restarts automatically after the update.

Using the Settings menu

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings › Device.

2. Depending on your printer model, select Update firmware or Firmware Update.
3. Depending on your printer model, select Check for updates or Check for updates now.

If an update is available, then select Install now.

The printer restarts automatically after the update.

141
Set up, install, and configure

Updating the firmware using the Embedded Web Server

Notes

• Before you begin, make sure that you have downloaded the firmware and saved it
on your computer or flash drive. For more information, see Downloading the printer
firmware on page 140.
• Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.

Using the update button

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. For
example, 123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Device.
3. Scroll down, and then click Firmware Update.
4. Depending on your printer model, click Check for updates or Check for updates now.

If an update is available, then click Install now.

The printer restarts automatically after the update.

Using the firmware flash file (.fls)

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. For
example, 123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Device.
3. Scroll down, and then click Firmware Update.
4. In the Update Firmware from File section, click Browse.
5. Search, and then select the .fls file.
6. Click Upload.

The printer restarts automatically after the update.

142
Set up, install, and configure

Updating the firmware using a flash drive

Notes

• Before you begin, make sure that you have downloaded the firmware and saved it
on your computer or flash drive. For more information, see Downloading the printer
firmware on page 140.
• The flash drive is formatted to FAT32.

1. Insert the flash drive into the front USB port of the printer.

The flash drive contents appear automatically on the printer display. If the files do not
appear, then select USB Drive on the home screen.
2. Search, and then select the .fls file.
3. Select Update Code.

The printer restarts automatically after the update.

Installing hardware options

Installing the optional 550‑sheet tray

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Notes

• This option must be always installed directly under the printer and must not be
installed together with another optional 550-sheet tray.
• This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

143
Set up, install, and configure

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3. Unpack the optional 550‑sheet tray.

Note: To avoid damaging the tray, make sure to hold the front and rear sides when
lifting it.

144
Set up, install, and configure

4. Attach the right tray cover.

5. Pull out the 550‑sheet tray insert.

6. Remove the upper tray cover.

145
Set up, install, and configure

7. Remove the screws.

8. Attach the lower tray cover.

9. Install the screws.

146
Set up, install, and configure

10. Attach the upper tray cover.

11. Insert the 550‑sheet tray insert.

12. Remove the cover under the right side of the printer.

147
Set up, install, and configure

13. Align the printer with the 550‑sheet tray, and then lower it into place.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require two or
more people to lift it safely.

148
Set up, install, and configure

14. Pull out the standard tray insert.

149
Set up, install, and configure

15. Secure the 550‑sheet tray to the printer.

16. Insert the standard tray insert.

150
Set up, install, and configure

17. Secure the rear part of the 550‑sheet tray to the printer.

151
Set up, install, and configure

18. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

19. Turn on the printer.

Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
Adding available options in the print driver on page 139.

Installing the 2 x 550-sheet tray

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Notes

• This option must be installed together with an optional 550‑sheet tray. Place the
option at the bottom of the configuration.
• If a 550‑sheet tray is already installed, uninstall the tray, remove the tray side cover,
remove the lower tray cover, and then place the tray on top of this option.
• This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

152
Set up, install, and configure

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3. Unpack the 2 x 550‑sheet tray.

4. Lock the caster to keep the 2 x 550‑sheet tray from moving.

153
Set up, install, and configure

5. Align the 550‑sheet tray with the 2 x 550‑sheet tray, and then lower it into place.

Note: To avoid damaging the tray, make sure to hold the front and rear sides when
lifting it.

154
Set up, install, and configure

6. Pull out the 550‑sheet tray insert.

155
Set up, install, and configure

7. Secure the 550‑sheet tray to the 2 x 550‑sheet tray.

156
Set up, install, and configure

8. Insert the 550‑sheet tray insert.

9. Secure the rear part of the 550‑sheet tray to the 2 x 550‑sheet tray.

157
Set up, install, and configure

10. Remove the cover under the right side of the printer.

158
Set up, install, and configure

11. Align the printer with the optional trays, and then lower it into place.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require two or
more people to lift it safely.

12. Pull out the standard tray insert.

159
Set up, install, and configure

13. Secure the 550‑sheet tray to the printer.

160
Set up, install, and configure

14. Insert the standard tray insert.

15. Secure the rear part of the 550‑sheet tray to the printer.

16. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

161
Set up, install, and configure

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

17. Turn on the printer.

Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
Adding available options in the print driver on page 139.

Installing the 2000-sheet tandem tray

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Notes

• This option must be installed together with an optional 550‑sheet tray. Placed this
option at the bottom of the configuration.
• If a 550‑sheet tray is already installed, uninstall the tray, remove the tray side cover,
remove the lower tray cover, and then place the tray on top of this option.
• This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

162
Set up, install, and configure

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3. Unpack the tandem tray, and then remove all the packing material.
4. Lock the caster to keep the tandem tray from moving.

163
Set up, install, and configure

5. Align the 550‑sheet tray with the tandem tray, and then lower it into place.

Note: To avoid damaging the tray, make sure to hold the front and rear sides when
lifting it.

164
Set up, install, and configure

6. Pull out the 550‑sheet tray insert.

165
Set up, install, and configure

7. Secure the 550‑sheet tray to the tandem tray.

166
Set up, install, and configure

8. Insert the tray insert.

9. Secure the rear part of the 550‑sheet tray to the tandem tray.

167
Set up, install, and configure

10. Remove the cover under the right side of the printer.

168
Set up, install, and configure

11. Align the printer with the optional trays, and then lower it into place.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require two or
more people to lift it safely.

12. Pull out the standard tray.

169
Set up, install, and configure

13. Secure the 550‑sheet tray to the printer.

170
Set up, install, and configure

14. Insert the tray.

15. Secure the rear part of the 550‑sheet tray to the printer.

171
Set up, install, and configure

16. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

17. Turn on the printer.

Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
Adding available options in the print driver on page 139.

172
Set up, install, and configure

Installing the cabinet

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Notes

• This option must be installed together with a 550‑sheet tray. Place this option at the
bottom of the configuration.
• If a 550‑sheet tray is already installed, then uninstall the tray, remove the lower tray
cover and place it on top of this option.
• This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Unpack, and then assemble the cabinet.

2. Turn off the printer.

3. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

173
Set up, install, and configure

4. Lock the caster to keep the cabinet from moving.

5. Attach the side cover of the 550‑sheet tray.

174
Set up, install, and configure

6. Align the tray with the cabinet, and then lower it into place.

Note: To avoid damaging the tray, make sure to hold the front and rear sides when
lifting it.

175
Set up, install, and configure

7. Pull out the tray insert.

176
Set up, install, and configure

8. Secure the tray to the cabinet.

177
Set up, install, and configure

9. Insert the tray insert.

10. Secure the rear part of the tray to the cabinet.

178
Set up, install, and configure

11. Remove the cover under the right side of the printer.

179
Set up, install, and configure

12. Align the printer with the cabinet and the tray, and then lower it into place.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require two or
more people to lift it safely.

13. Pull out the standard tray insert.

14. Secure the 550‑sheet tray to the printer.

180
Set up, install, and configure

15. Insert the standard tray insert.

16. Secure the rear part of the 550‑sheet tray to the printer.

181
Set up, install, and configure

17. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

18. Turn on the printer.

Installing the 1500‑sheet tray

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

182
Set up, install, and configure

Notes

• Before installing this option, make sure that an optional 550-sheet tray and either of
the 2 x 500-sheet tray or 2000-sheet tray are already installed.
• This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

183
Set up, install, and configure

3. Remove the connection cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

4. Remove the port cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

184
Set up, install, and configure

5. Remove the screw caps from the printer.

Note: Do not throw away the screw caps.

6. Unpack the 1500‑sheet tray.

7. Install the screws for the mounting bracket.

185
Set up, install, and configure

8. Attach the mounting bracket to the printer.

Note: Use the mounting bracket and screws that came with the 1500‑sheet tray.

186
Set up, install, and configure

9. Install the remaining screws.

187
Set up, install, and configure

10. Install the 1500‑sheet tray.

11. Connect the tray cable to the printer.

188
Set up, install, and configure

12. Attach the tray cable cover.

189
Set up, install, and configure

190
Set up, install, and configure

13. Slide the 1500‑sheet tray toward the printer.

14. Connect one end of the printer power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the
electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

15. Turn on the printer.

Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
Adding available options in the print driver on page 139.

Installing the staple finisher

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

191
Set up, install, and configure

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3. Unpack the staple finisher, and then remove all the packing material.
4. Install the feed guide.

192
Set up, install, and configure

5. Remove the standard bin.

Note: Do not throw away the bin.

6. Before installing the option, place the exit bin flag into the closed position.

Note: When the option is removed, place the exit bin flag into the open position.

193
Set up, install, and configure

7. Remove the backup roller.

Note: Do not throw away the roller.

194
Set up, install, and configure

8. Insert the feed roller that came with the staple finisher until it clicks into place.

195
Set up, install, and configure

Note: Make sure that the metal spring is in front of the feed roller.

9. Attach the roller cover until it clicks into place.

196
Set up, install, and configure

10. Open the front door, and then remove the cover on the left side of the printer.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

197
Set up, install, and configure

11. Remove the left rear cover.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

198
Set up, install, and configure

12. Remove the inner bin cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

199
Set up, install, and configure

13. Align, and then insert the inner bin cover that came with the staple finisher.

200
Set up, install, and configure

14. Install the screws to the inner bin cover.

201
Set up, install, and configure

15. Attach the staple finisher slider.

202
Set up, install, and configure

16. Insert the staple finisher.

203
Set up, install, and configure

17. Install the mounting bracket to secure the finisher to the printer.

Note: Use the screw that came with the finisher.

18. Attach the left rear cover, and then slide the staple finisher to the left.

204
Set up, install, and configure

19. Attach the left upper trim cover that came with the finisher.

205
Set up, install, and configure

20. Insert the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.

21. Close the front door, and then slide the finisher toward the printer.

22. Connect the option cable to the printer.

206
Set up, install, and configure

23. Connect one end of the printer power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the
electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

24. Turn on the printer.

Add the finisher in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information,
see Adding available options in the print driver on page 139.

Installing the offset stacker

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

1. Turn off the printer.

207
Set up, install, and configure

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3. Unpack the offset stacker, and then remove all the packing material.
4. Attach the inner rear cover to the offset stacker.

208
Set up, install, and configure

5. Remove the standard bin.

209
Set up, install, and configure

Note: Do not throw away the bin.

6. Remove the paper transport connector cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

210
Set up, install, and configure

7. Before installing the option, place the exit bin flag into the closed position.

211
Set up, install, and configure

8. Align, and then install the offset stacker to the printer.

Note: Make sure that the parts are securely attached and aligned to the printer.

212
Set up, install, and configure

9. Attach the protective strips of the offset stacker to the printer.

10. Place the exit bin flag into the open position.

213
Set up, install, and configure

11. Attach the bin flag cover until it clicks into place.

12. Connect one end of the printer power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the
electrical outlet.

214
Set up, install, and configure

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

13. Turn on the printer.

Add the offset stacker in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more
information, see Adding available options in the print driver on page 139.

Installing the folding paper transport

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Notes

• This option can also be installed together with a staple, hole punch finisher or
booklet finisher.
• This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

215
Set up, install, and configure

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3. Unpack the folding paper transport, and then remove all the packing material.
4. Remove the standard bin.

Note: Do not throw away the bin.

216
Set up, install, and configure

5. Before installing the option, place the exit bin flag into the closed position.

Note: When the option is removed, place the exit bin flag into the open position.

217
Set up, install, and configure

6. Remove the backup roller.

Note: Do not throw away the roller.

218
Set up, install, and configure

7. Insert the feed roller that came with the option until it clicks into place.

219
Set up, install, and configure

Note: Make sure that the metal spring is in front of the feed roller.

8. Attach the roller cover until it clicks into place.

220
Set up, install, and configure

9. Open the front door, and then remove the cover on the left side of the printer.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

221
Set up, install, and configure

10. Close the front door.

11. Remove the paper transport connector cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

222
Set up, install, and configure

12. Remove the left rear cover.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

223
Set up, install, and configure

13. Remove the inner bin cover.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

224
Set up, install, and configure

14. Align, and then insert the inner bin cover that came with the option.

15. Install the screws to the inner bin cover.

225
Set up, install, and configure

16. Attach the pieces of foam tape to the option.

226
Set up, install, and configure

17. Open door F, and then tighten the screws.

227
Set up, install, and configure

18. Close door F.

19. Attach the metal bracket to the option.

228
Set up, install, and configure

20. Insert the option.

Note: Make sure that the metal bracket is in front of the printer.

21. Open door F, and then using the screwdriver that came with the option, install the screw.

229
Set up, install, and configure

22. Close door F.

23. Install the screws into the option.

24. Attach the left rear cover.

230
Set up, install, and configure

25. Open the front door, and then attach the cover to the left side of the printer.

26. Close the front door.

27. Raise the bin flap, and then align and attach the option bin.

231
Set up, install, and configure

28. Install the screws to the option bin.

232
Set up, install, and configure

29. Attach the trim cover.

233
Set up, install, and configure

30. Connect the option cable to the printer.

31. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

32. Turn on the printer.

234
Set up, install, and configure

Installing the staple, hole punch finisher and paper

transport option

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

235
Set up, install, and configure

3. Unpack the paper transport.

4. Remove the standard bin.

Note: Do not throw away the bin.

236
Set up, install, and configure

5. Before installing the option, place the exit bin flag into the closed position.

Note: When the option is removed, place the exit bin flag into the open position.

6. Remove the backup roller.

Note: Do not throw away the roller.

237
Set up, install, and configure

7. Insert the feed roller that came with the paper transport until it clicks into place.

238
Set up, install, and configure

Note: Make sure that the metal spring is in front of the feed roller.

8. Attach the cover until it clicks into place.

239
Set up, install, and configure

9. Open the front door, and then remove the cover on the left side of the printer.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

240
Set up, install, and configure

10. Close the front door.

11. Remove the paper transport connector cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

241
Set up, install, and configure

12. Remove the cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

242
Set up, install, and configure

13. Attach the metal bracket.

14. Insert the paper transport.

243
Set up, install, and configure

15. Open handle G, and then install the screw into the front of the paper transport.

244
Set up, install, and configure

16. Close handle G.

17. Install the screw into the rear of the paper transport.

18. Open the front door, and then attach the cover that came with the paper transport to the left
side of the printer.

245
Set up, install, and configure

19. Close the front door.

20. Unpack the staple, hole punch finisher.
21. Install the stabilizer.

22. Remove the pieces of tape around the finisher.

246
Set up, install, and configure

23. Attach the bracket to the finisher.

24. Attach the foam tape to the finisher.

247
Set up, install, and configure

25. Attach the feed guide to the finisher.

248
Set up, install, and configure

26. Attach the bin to the finisher.

249
Set up, install, and configure

27. Open the finisher door, and then insert the hole punch box.

250
Set up, install, and configure

28. Place the bin extender into the finisher bin.

Notes
◦ The bin extender is used for A3‑size paper or longer and in high humidity
conditions to help in stacking the paper.
◦ The bin capacity is reduced when the bin extender is used.

251
Set up, install, and configure

29. Close the finisher door.

30. Attach the mounting bracket to the printer.

Note: Make sure that the screws are aligned to the markers on the mounting
bracket.

252
Set up, install, and configure

31. Attach the metal bracket that came with the paper transport to the printer.

253
Set up, install, and configure

32. Open the finisher door, remove the screw, and then pull the finisher lock.

254
Set up, install, and configure

33. Attach the finisher to the printer.

34. Lock the finisher to the printer, and then install the screw.

255
Set up, install, and configure

35. Connect the finisher cable to the printer.

36. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

256
Set up, install, and configure

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

37. Turn on the printer.

Installing the staple, hole punch finisher and folding

paper transport

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

257
Set up, install, and configure

3. Unpack the folding paper transport, and then remove all the packing material.
4. Remove the standard bin.

Note: Do not throw away the bin.

258
Set up, install, and configure

5. Before installing the option, place the exit bin flag into the closed position.

Note: When the option is removed, place the exit bin flag into the open position.

6. Remove the backup roller.

Note: Do not throw away the roller.

259
Set up, install, and configure

7. Insert the feed roller that came with the option until it clicks into place.

260
Set up, install, and configure

Note: Make sure that the metal spring is in front of the feed roller.

8. Attach the cover until it clicks into place.

261
Set up, install, and configure

9. Open the front door, and then remove the cover on the left side of the printer.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

262
Set up, install, and configure

10. Close the front door.

11. Remove the paper transport connector cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

263
Set up, install, and configure

12. Remove the left rear cover.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

264
Set up, install, and configure

13. Remove the inner bin cover.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

265
Set up, install, and configure

14. Align, and then insert the inner bin cover that came with the folding paper transport.

15. Install the screws to the inner bin cover.

266
Set up, install, and configure

16. Attach the pieces of foam tape to the option.

267
Set up, install, and configure

17. Open door F, and then tighten the screws.

268
Set up, install, and configure

18. Close door F.

19. Attach the bracket to the option.

269
Set up, install, and configure

20. Insert the option.

Note: Make sure that the metal bracket is in front of the printer.

21. Open door F, and then using the screwdriver that came with the option, install the screw.

270
Set up, install, and configure

22. Close door F.

23. Install the screws into the option.

24. Attach the left rear cover.

271
Set up, install, and configure

25. Unpack the staple, hole punch finisher.

26. Install the stabilizer.

27. Remove the pieces of tape around the finisher.

28. Attach the bracket to the finisher.

272
Set up, install, and configure

29. Attach the foam tape to the finisher.

273
Set up, install, and configure

Note: Remove the small portion of foam on the right side of the finisher.

30. Attach the feed guide to the finisher.

274
Set up, install, and configure

31. Attach the bin to the finisher.

275
Set up, install, and configure

32. Open the finisher door, and then insert the hole punch box.

276
Set up, install, and configure

33. Place the bin extender into the finisher bin.

Notes
◦ The bin extender is used for A3‑size paper or longer and in high humidity
conditions to help in stacking the paper.
◦ The bin capacity is reduced when the bin extender is used.

277
Set up, install, and configure

34. Close the finisher door.

35. Raise the bin flap, and then align and attach the cover to the option.

278
Set up, install, and configure

36. Install the screws.

279
Set up, install, and configure

37. Open the front door, and then attach the trim cover that came with the option.

38. Loosely attach a screw to the printer.

39. Align the mounting bracket to the screw.

280
Set up, install, and configure

40. Loosely attach screws into the mounting bracket.

41. Tighten the screws to secure the mounting bracket onto the printer.

Note: Make sure that the screws are aligned to the markers on the mounting
bracket.

281
Set up, install, and configure

42. Open the finisher door, remove the screw, and then pull the finisher lock.

43. Connect the option cable to the printer.

282
Set up, install, and configure

44. Connect the finisher cable to the option.

283
Set up, install, and configure

45. Attach the finisher to the printer.

46. Lock the finisher to the printer, and then install the screw.

284
Set up, install, and configure

47. Close the finisher door.

48. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

49. Turn on the printer.

285
Set up, install, and configure

Installing the booklet finisher and paper transport

option

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

286
Set up, install, and configure

3. Unpack the paper transport.

4. Remove the standard bin.

Note: Do not throw away the bin.

287
Set up, install, and configure

5. Before installing the option, place the exit bin flag into the closed position.

Note: When the option is removed, place the exit bin flag into the open position.

6. Remove the backup roller.

Note: Do not throw away the roller.

288
Set up, install, and configure

7. Insert the feed roller that came with the paper transport until it clicks into place.

289
Set up, install, and configure

Note: Make sure that the metal spring is in front of the feed roller.

8. Attach the roller cover until it clicks into place.

290
Set up, install, and configure

9. Open the front door, and then remove the cover on the left side of the printer.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

291
Set up, install, and configure

10. Close the front door.

11. Remove the paper transport connector cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

292
Set up, install, and configure

12. Remove the cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

293
Set up, install, and configure

13. Attach the metal bracket.

14. Insert the paper transport.

294
Set up, install, and configure

15. Open handle G, and then install the screw into the front of the paper transport.

295
Set up, install, and configure

16. Close handle G.

17. Install the screw into the rear of the paper transport.

18. Open the front door, and then attach the cover that came with the paper transport to the left
side of the printer.

296
Set up, install, and configure

19. Close the front door.

20. Unpack the booklet finisher, and then remove all the packing material.
21. Attach the bracket to the finisher.

297
Set up, install, and configure

22. Attach the foam tape to the finisher.

298
Set up, install, and configure

23. Attach the feed guide to the finisher.

299
Set up, install, and configure

24. Attach the upper bin to the finisher.

300
Set up, install, and configure

25. Raise the bin flap, and then attach the lower bin to the finisher.

301
Set up, install, and configure

26. Open the finisher door.

27. Remove the packing material from the hole punch box, and then insert it into the finisher.

302
Set up, install, and configure

28. Place the bin extender on the finisher bin.

Notes
◦ The bin extender is used for A3‑size paper or longer and in high humidity
conditions to help in stacking the paper.
◦ The bin capacity is reduced when the bin extender is used.

303
Set up, install, and configure

29. Attach the basket to the rear of the finisher.

304
Set up, install, and configure

30. Close the finisher door.

31. Loosely attach a screw to the printer.

305
Set up, install, and configure

32. Align the mounting bracket to the screw.

33. Loosely attach screws to the mounting bracket.

306
Set up, install, and configure

34. Attach the bracket that came with the paper transport to the printer.

35. Tighten the screws to secure the mounting bracket onto the printer.

Note: Make sure that the screws are aligned to the markers on the mounting
bracket.

307
Set up, install, and configure

36. Open the finisher door, remove the screw, and then pull the finisher lock.

37. Attach the finisher to the printer.

308
Set up, install, and configure

38. Lock the finisher to the printer, and then install the screw.

309
Set up, install, and configure

39. Close the finisher door.

40. Connect the finisher cable to the printer.

41. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

42. Turn on the printer.

Installing the booklet finisher and folding paper

transport

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

310
Set up, install, and configure

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3. Unpack the folding paper transport.

4. Remove the standard bin.

Note: Do not throw away the bin.

311
Set up, install, and configure

5. Before installing the option, place the exit bin flag into the closed position.

Note: When the option is removed, place the exit bin flag into the open position.

312
Set up, install, and configure

6. Remove the backup roller.

Note: Do not throw away the roller.

313
Set up, install, and configure

7. Insert the feed roller that came with the option until it clicks into place.

314
Set up, install, and configure

Note: Make sure that the metal spring is in front of the feed roller.

8. Attach the roller cover until it clicks into place.

315
Set up, install, and configure

9. Open the front door, and then remove the cover on the left side of the printer.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

316
Set up, install, and configure

10. Close the front door.

11. Remove the paper transport connector cover.

Note: Do not throw away the cover.

317
Set up, install, and configure

12. Remove the left rear cover.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

318
Set up, install, and configure

13. Remove the inner bin cover.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

319
Set up, install, and configure

14. Align, and then insert the inner bin cover that came with the option.

15. Install the screws to the inner bin cover.

320
Set up, install, and configure

16. Attach the pieces of foam tape to the option.

321
Set up, install, and configure

17. Open door F, and then tighten the screws.

322
Set up, install, and configure

18. Close door F.

19. Attach the bracket to the option.

323
Set up, install, and configure

20. Insert the option.

Note: Make sure that the metal bracket is in front of the printer.

21. Open door F, and then using the screwdriver that came with the option, install the screw.

324
Set up, install, and configure

22. Close door F.

23. Install the screws into the option.

24. Attach the left rear cover.

325
Set up, install, and configure

25. Unpack the booklet finisher, and then remove all the packing material.
26. Attach the bracket to the finisher.

326
Set up, install, and configure

27. Attach the foam tape to the finisher.

327
Set up, install, and configure

28. Attach the feed guide to the finisher.

328
Set up, install, and configure

29. Attach the upper bin to the finisher.

329
Set up, install, and configure

30. Raise the bin flap, and then attach the lower bin to the finisher.

330
Set up, install, and configure

31. Open the finisher door.

32. Remove the packing material from the hole punch box, and then insert it into the finisher.

331
Set up, install, and configure

33. Place the bin extender on the finisher bin.

Notes
◦ The bin extender is used for A3‑size paper or longer and in high humidity
conditions to help in stacking the paper.
◦ The bin capacity is reduced when the bin extender is used.

332
Set up, install, and configure

34. Attach the basket to the rear of the finisher.

333
Set up, install, and configure

35. Close the finisher door.

36. Raise the bin flap, and then align and attach the cover to the option.

334
Set up, install, and configure

37. Install the screws.

335
Set up, install, and configure

38. Open the front door, and then attach the trim cover that came with the option.

39. Loosely attach a screw to the printer.

40. Align the mounting bracket to the screw.

336
Set up, install, and configure

41. Loosely attach screws into the mounting bracket.

42. Tighten the screws to secure the mounting bracket onto the printer.

Note: Make sure that the screws are aligned to the markers on the mounting
bracket.

337
Set up, install, and configure

43. Open the finisher door, remove the screw, and then pull the finisher lock.

44. Connect the option cable to the printer.

338
Set up, install, and configure

45. Connect the finisher cable to the option.

339
Set up, install, and configure

46. Attach the finisher to the printer.

47. Lock the finisher to the printer, and then install the screw.

340
Set up, install, and configure

48. Close the finisher door.

49. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

50. Turn on the printer.

Installing the intelligent storage drive

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

341
Set up, install, and configure

Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3. Open the controller board access cover.

342
Set up, install, and configure

Warning—Potential Damage
Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board
components or connectors.

4. Unpack the intelligent storage drive (ISD).

343
Set up, install, and configure

Warning—Potential Damage
Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the storage drive.

5. Locate the ISD connector.

6. Insert the ISD to its connector.

344
Set up, install, and configure

7. Close the controller board access cover.

345
Set up, install, and configure

346
Set up, install, and configure

8. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

9. Turn on the printer.

Installing an internal solutions port

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.

1. Turn off the printer.

347
Set up, install, and configure

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3. Open the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage
Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.

348
Set up, install, and configure

4. Remove the internal solutions port (ISP) cover.

Note: Do not throw away the screw and cover.

349
Set up, install, and configure

5. Unpack the ISP kit.

1 ISP

2 ISP extended cable

350
Set up, install, and configure

3 Mounting bracket

4 Thumbscrews

6. Attach the mounting bracket to the controller board until it clicks into place.

7. Attach the ISP to the mounting bracket, and then connect the ISP extended cable to its
connector on the controller board.

351
Set up, install, and configure

352
Set up, install, and configure

8. Secure the ISP to the printer.

9. Close the controller board access cover.

353
Set up, install, and configure

354
Set up, install, and configure

10. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

11. Turn on the printer.

Installing the card reader

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables
going into the printer.

1. Turn off the printer.

2. Open door B.

355
Set up, install, and configure

3. Open the front USB port cover.

4. Remove the lower cover of the front USB port.

Note: If your printer does not have this part, then proceed to the next step.

356
Set up, install, and configure

5. Remove the protective cover from the card reader.

6. Insert the card reader.

357
Set up, install, and configure

7. Attach the lower cover until it clicks into place.

8. Attach the sticker guide to front USB port cover.

358
Set up, install, and configure

9. Attach the front USB port cover until it clicks into place.

359
Set up, install, and configure

10. Close door B until it clicks into place.

360
Set up, install, and configure

11. Turn on the printer.

361
Set up, install, and configure

Changing the printer port settings after installing an

internal solutions port

Notes

• If the printer has a static IP address, then do not change the configuration.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address,
then do not change the configuration.
• If you are adding a wireless internal solutions port (ISP) to a printer previously
configured for an Ethernet connection, then disconnect the printer from the Ethernet
network.

For Windows users

1. Open the printers folder.

2. From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.
3. Configure the port from the list.
4. Update the IP address.
5. Apply the changes.

For Macintosh users

1. From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then
select + > IP.
2. Type the IP address in the address field.
3. Apply the changes.

Networking
Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network
Before you begin, make sure that:

• Active Adapter is set to Auto. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports
> Network Overview > Active Adapter.
• The Ethernet cable is not connected to the printer.

Using the control panel

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Setup On
Printer Panel > Choose Network.
2. Select a Wi‑Fi network, and then type the network password.

362
Set up, install, and configure

Note: For printers with built‑in Wi‑Fi capability, a prompt for setting up the Wi‑Fi
network appears during initial setup.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi

Protected Setup (WPS)
Before you begin, make sure that:

• The access point (wireless router) is WPS‑certified or WPS‑compatible. For more

information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer. For more information, see the
instructions that came with the adapter.
• Active Adapter is set to Auto. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/
Ports > Network Overview > Active Adapter.

Using the Push Button method

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wi‑Fi
Protected Setup > Start Push Button Method.
2. Follow the instructions on the display.

Using the personal identification number (PIN) method

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wi‑Fi
Protected Setup > Start PIN Method.
2. Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3. Open a web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.

Notes
◦ To know the IP address, see the documentation that came with your access
point.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

4. Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your
access point.
5. Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the changes.

Configuring Wi‑Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct® enables Wi‑Fi devices to connect directly to each other without using an
access point (wireless router).

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct.
2. Configure the settings.

363
Set up, install, and configure

◦ Enable Wi‑Fi Direct—Enables the printer to broadcast its own Wi‑Fi Direct network.
◦ Wi‑Fi Direct Name—Assigns a name for the Wi‑Fi Direct network.
◦ Wi‑Fi Direct Password—Assigns the password for negotiating the wireless security
when using the peer‑to-peer connection.
◦ Show Password on Setup Page—Shows the password on the Network Setup Page.
◦ Preferred Channel Number—Assigns the preferred channel of the Wi‑Fi Direct
network.
◦ Group Owner IP Address—Assigns the IP address of the group owner.
◦ Auto-Accept Push Button Requests—Lets the printer accept connection requests
automatically.

Note: Accepting push‑button requests automatically is not secured.

Notes

• By default, the Wi-Fi Direct network password is not visible on the printer display. To
show the password, enable the password peek icon. From the control panel,
navigate to Settings > Security > Miscellaneous > Enable Password/PIN Reveal.
• To know the password of the Wi-Fi Direct network without showing it on the printer
display, print the Network Setup Page. From the control panel, navigate to Settings
> Reports > Network > Network Setup Page.

Connecting a mobile device to the printer

Before connecting your mobile device, make sure that Wi‑Fi Direct has been configured.
For more information, see Configuring Wi‑Fi Direct on page 363.

Using Wi‑Fi Direct

Note: These instructions apply only to mobile devices running on the Android™
platform.

1. From the mobile device, go to the Settings menu.

2. Enable Wi‑Fi, and then tap > Wi‑Fi Direct.
3. Select the printer Wi-Fi Direct name.
4. Confirm the connection on the printer control panel.

364
Set up, install, and configure

Using Wi‑Fi

1. From the mobile device, go to the Settings menu.

2. Tap Wi‑Fi, and then select the printer Wi-Fi Direct name.

Note: The string DIRECT-xy (where x and y are two random characters) is added
before the Wi-Fi Direct name.

3. Enter the Wi-Fi Direct password.

Connecting a computer to the printer

Before connecting your computer, make sure that Wi‑Fi Direct has been configured. For
more information, see Configuring Wi‑Fi Direct on page 363.

For Windows users

1. Open Printers & scanners, and then click Add a printer or scanner.
2. Click Show Wi-Fi Direct printers, and then select the printer Wi‑Fi Direct name.
3. From the printer display, take note of the eight-digit PIN of the printer.
4. Enter the PIN on the computer.

Note: If the print driver is not already installed, then Windows downloads the
appropriate driver.

For Macintosh users

1. Click the wireless icon, and then select the printer Wi‑Fi Direct name.

Note: The string DIRECT-xy (where x and y are two random characters) is added
before the Wi-Fi Direct name.

2. Type the Wi‑Fi Direct password.

Deactivating the Wi‑Fi network

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports > Network Overview >
Active Adapter > Standard Network.
2. Select Yes to restart the printer.

365
Set up, install, and configure

Checking the printer connectivity

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page.
2. Check the first section of the page, and confirm that the status is connected.
If the status is not connected, then the LAN drop may be inactive or the network cable may
be malfunctioning. Contact your administrator for assistance.

Setting up serial printing (Windows only)

1. Set the parameters in the printer.
a. From the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b. Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c. Apply the changes.
2. From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
3. Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.
4. Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.

Notes

• Serial printing reduces printing speed.

• Make sure that the serial cable is connected to the serial port on your printer.

366
Secure the printer

Secure the printer

Erasing printer memory
To erase volatile memory or buffered data in your printer, turn off the printer.
To erase nonvolatile memory, device and network settings, security settings, and
embedded solutions, do the following:

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings › Device › Maintenance › Out of Service
Erase.
2. Select Sanitize all information on nonvolatile memory, and then select ERASE.
3. Select Start initial setup wizard or Leave printer offline, and then select Next.
4. Start the process.

Note: This process also destroys the encryption key that is used to protect user
data. Destroying the encryption key makes the data irrecoverable.

Erasing printer storage drive

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings › Device › Maintenance › Out of Service
Erase.
2. Depending on the storage drive that is installed on your printer, do either of the following:
◦ For hard disk, select Sanitize all information on hard disk, select ERASE, and then
select a method to erase data.

Note: The process to sanitize the hard disk can take from several minutes to
more than an hour, making the printer unavailable for other tasks.

◦ For intelligent storage drive, select Cryptographically erase all user data on ISD,
and then select ERASE.

Restoring factory default settings

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings › Device › Restore Factory Defaults. Select
Restore Settings.
2. Select the settings that you want to restore, and then select RESTORE.

367
Secure the printer

Statement of Volatility
Type of memory Description

Volatile memory The printer uses standard random access

memory (RAM) to buffer temporarily user
data during simple print and copy jobs.

Nonvolatile memory The printer may use two forms of nonvolatile

memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash
memory). Both types store the operating
system, printer settings, and network
information. They also store scanner and
bookmark settings and embedded solutions.

Hard disk storage drive Some printers may have a hard disk drive
installed. The printer hard disk is designed
for printer-specific functionality. The hard
disk lets the printer retain buffered user data
from complex print jobs, form data, and font
data.

Intelligent storage drive (ISD) Some printers may have an ISD installed.
ISD uses nonvolatile flash memory to store
user data from complex print jobs, form
data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

• The printer is decommissioned.

• The printer hard disk or ISD is replaced.
• The printer is moved to a different department or location.
• The printer is serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is sold to another organization.

Note: To dispose a storage drive, follow the policies and procedures of your
organization.

368
Print

Print
Printing from a computer
For Windows users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
If necessary, adjust the settings.

3. Click OK, and then click Print.

For Macintosh users

1. With a document open, choose File > Print.

2. Select a printer, and then select a setting from Presets.
If necessary, adjust the settings.

3. Click Print.

Printing from a mobile device

Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Print
Lexmark™ Print is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android™
platform version 6.0 or later. It lets you send documents and images to network-connected
printers and print management servers.

Notes

• Make sure that you download the Lexmark Print app from the Google Play™ store
and enable it in the mobile device.
• Make sure that the printer and mobile device are connected to the same network.

1. From your mobile device, select a document from the file manager.
2. Send or share the document to Lexmark Print.

Note: Some third‑party apps may not support the send or share feature. For more
information, see the documentation that came with the app.

3. Select a printer.

369
Print

If necessary, adjust the settings.

4. Print the document.

Printing from a mobile device using Mopria™ Print

Service
Mopria Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android™
version 5.0 or later. It lets you print directly to any Mopria™ certified printer.

Note: Make sure that you download Mopria Print Service from the Google Play™
store and enable it on your mobile device.

1. From your mobile device, launch a compatible application or select a document from the file
manager.
2. Tap > Print.
3. Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

4. Tap .

Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint

The AirPrint software feature is a mobile printing solution that lets you print directly from
Apple devices to an AirPrint‑certified printer.

Notes

• Make sure that the Apple device and the printer are connected to the same network.
If the network has multiple wireless hubs, then make sure that both devices are
connected to the same subnet.
• This application is supported only in some Apple devices.

1. From your mobile device, select a document from your file manager or launch a compatible
application.

2. Tap > Print.

3. Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
4. Print the document.

Printing from a mobile device using Wi‑Fi Direct®

Wi‑Fi Direct® is a printing service that lets you print to any Wi‑Fi Direct‑ready printer.

370
Print

Note: Make sure that the mobile device is connected to the printer wireless
network. For more information, see Connecting a mobile device to the printer on
page 364.

1. From your mobile device, launch a compatible application or select a document from your file
manager.
2. Depending on your mobile device, do one of the following:

◦ Tap > Print.

◦ Tap > Print.

◦ Tap > Print.

3. Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

4. Print the document.

Printing from a flash drive

1. Insert the flash drive.
For more information on supported flash drives, see Supported flash drives and file types on
page 102.

Notes
◦ If you insert the flash drive when an error message appears, then the printer
ignores the flash drive.
◦ If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then
Busy appears on the display.

371
Print

2. From the control panel, select Print.

3. Select USB Drive, and then select the document that you want to print.
If necessary, configure the settings.

4. Print the document.

Warning—Potential Damage
To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the flash drive or the printer
in the area shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device.

Configuring confidential jobs

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
2. Configure the settings.

Setting Description

Max Invalid PIN Set the limit for entering an invalid PIN.

Note: When the limit is reached, the

print jobs for that username are
deleted.

372
Print

Setting Description

Confidential Job Expiration Set an individual expiration time for each

held job before it is automatically deleted
from the printer memory, hard disk, or
intelligent storage drive.

Note: A held job is either

Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or
Verify.

Repeat Job Expiration Set the expiration time for print jobs that you
want to repeat.

Verify Job Expiration Set the expiration time for printing a copy of
a job for you to check its quality before
printing the remaining copies.

Reserve Job Expiration Set the expiration time for jobs that you want
to store in the printer for printing later.

Require All Jobs to be Held Set the printer to hold all print jobs.

Keep duplicate documents Set the printer to keep all documents with
the same file name.

Printing confidential and other held jobs

For Windows users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3. Click Print and Hold.
4. Click Use Print and Hold, and then assign a username.
5. Select from any of the following print job types:

◦ Confidential print—The printer asks for a personal identification number before

letting you print the job.

Note: If you select this job type, then enter a four‑digit personal identification
number (PIN).

◦ Verify print—The printer prints one copy and holds the remaining copies that you
requested from the driver in printer memory.
◦ Reserve print—The printer stores the job in memory so that you can print the job
later.
◦ Repeat print—The printer prints all requested copies of the job and stores the job in
memory so you can print additional copies later.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Print.

373
Print

8. From the printer control panel, release the print job.

a. Select Print.
b. Select Held jobs, and then select your username.

Note: For confidential print jobs, select Confidential, enter the PIN, and then
select OK.

c. Select the print job, and then select Print.

For Macintosh users

1. With a document open, choose File > Print.

2. Select a printer.
3. From the Print Job Security drop‑down menu, enable Print with PIN, and then enter a
four‑digit PIN.
4. Click Print.
5. From the printer control panel, release the print job.

a. Select Held jobs, and then select the computer name.

b. Select Confidential, and then enter the PIN.
c. Select the print job, and then select Print.

Printing a font sample list

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Reports > Print > Print Fonts.
2. Select the type of font.

Printing a directory list

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Reports > Print.
2. Select Print Directory.

Placing separator sheets in print jobs

1. With a document open, click File > Print.
2. Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3. Click Paper/Finishing.
4. In the Separator sheets menu, select a setting.
5. Click OK, and then click Print.

Canceling a print job

1. From the control panel, select Job Queue.
2. Select Print, and then select a job to cancel.

374
Print

Note: If a document is already printing, then select Cancel job in the lower‑right
corner of the display to stop printing.

Adjusting toner darkness

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality.
2. Adjust the setting for Toner Darkness.

375
Printer menus

Printer menus
Menu map
Device
• Preferences • Accessibility
• Eco‑Mode • Restore Factory
• Remote Operator Defaults
Panel • Maintenance
• Notifications • Update Firmware
• Power Management • About this Printer
• Share Data with
Lexmark

Print
• Layout • PDF
• Finishing 1 • PostScript
• Setup • PCL
• Quality • Image
• Job Accounting

Paper
• Tray Configuration • Bin Configuration 1
• Media Configuration

USB Drive Flash Drive Print

Network/Ports
• Network Overview • IPSec
• Wireless • 802.1x
• Wi‑Fi Direct • LPD Configuration
• Mobile Services • HTTP/FTP Settings
Management • ThinPrint
• Ethernet • USB
• TCP/IP • Restrict external
• SNMP network access

Security
• Login Methods • Confidential Print
• Schedule USB Setup
Devices • Encryption
• Security Audit Log • Erase Temporary
• Login Restrictions Data Files
• Solutions LDAP
Settings
• Miscellaneous

Cloud Services Cloud Services Enrollment

376
Printer menus

Reports
• Menu Settings Page • Print
• Device • Network

Troubleshooting Print Quality Test Pages

Forms Merge 2 Forms Merge

1 Appears only when a finisher is installed.
2 Appears only when a storage drive is installed.

Device
Preferences

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Display Language N/A [List of languages] Set the language of

the text that
appears on the
display.

Country/Region N/A [List of countries or Identify the country

regions] or region where the
printer is configured
to operate.

Run initial setup N/A Off* Run the setup

wizard.
On

Keyboard Keyboard Type [List of languages] Select a language

as a keyboard type.

Note: All
the
Keyboard
Type
values may
not appear
or may
require
special
hardware to
appear.

377
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Date and Time Configure Current Date and Configure the

Time printer date and
time and network
Manually Set Date time protocol.
and Time

Date Format Notes

(MM‑DD‑YYYY*)
• MM‑DD‑YYYY
Time Format (12 is the
hour A.M./P.M.*) U.S.
factory
Time Zone default
setting.
DST (GMT) Offset
DD‑MM‑YYYY
DST Start is the
international
DST End factory
default
DST Offset setting.
• UTC
Network Time Enable NTP (On*) (GMT)
Protocol Offset,
NTP Server DST
Start,
Enable DST
Authentication End,
(None*) and
DST
Key ID Offset
appear
Password
only
when
Time
Zone
is set
to
(UTC+user)
Custom.
• Key
ID
and
Password
appear
only
when
Enable
Authentication
is set
to
MD5
key.

378
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Paper Sizes N/A U.S.* Specify the unit of

measurement for
Metric paper sizes.

Note: The
country or
region
selected in
the initial
setup
wizard
determines
the initial
paper size
setting.

Screen Brightness N/A 20–100% (100*) Adjust the

brightness of the
display.

Flash Drive N/A Disabled Enable access to

Access the flash drive
Enabled* function of the
printer.

Allow Background N/A Off Specify whether

Removal background
On* removal is allowed.

Device Sounds Mute All Sounds Off* Configure the

sound settings of
On the printer.

Button Feedback Off

On*

Volume 0–10 (5*)

Alarm Control Off

Single*

Continuous

Cartridge Alarm Off

Single*

Continuous

379
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Screen Timeout N/A 5–300 seconds Set the idle time in

(60*) seconds before the
display shows the
home screen, or
before the printer
logs out a user
account
automatically.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Eco-Mode

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Print Sides 1‑Sided Specify whether to

print on one side or
2‑Sided* both sides of the
paper.

Pages per Side Off* Specify the number

of pages to print on
2 pages per side one side of a sheet
of paper.
3 pages per side

4 pages per side

6 pages per side

9 pages per side

12 pages per side

16 pages per side

Toner Darkness 1–5 (4*) Determine the

lightness or
darkness of text
images.

Color Saver Off* Set the printer to

reduce the amount
On of toner that it uses
when printing
graphics and
images.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

380
Printer menus

Remote Operator Panel

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

External VNC Don’t Allow* Connect an external Virtual Network

Connection Computing (VNC) client to the remote
Allow control panel.

Authentication None* Set the authentication type when accessing

Type the VNC client server.
Standard
Authentication

VNC Password The setting is Specify the password to connect to the VNC
user‑defined. client server.

Note: This menu item appears only

if Authentication Type is set to
Standard Authentication.

Notifications

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Alarm Control N/A Off Set the number of

times that the alarm
Single* sounds when the
printer requires
Continuous user intervention.

Supplies Show Supply Show estimates* Show the estimated

Estimates status of the
Do not show supplies.
estimates

Cartridge Alarm Off Set the number of

times that the alarm
Single* sounds when the
toner cartridge is
Continuous low.

381
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Staple Alarm Off* Set the number of

times that the alarm
Single sounds when the
staple cartridge is
Continuous empty.

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
a staple
finisher is
installed.

Hole Punch Alarm Off* Set the number of

times that the alarm
Single sounds when the
hole punch
Continuous container is full or
missing.

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
a staple,
hole punch
finisher is
installed.

Email Alerts Setup Primary SMTP The setting is Type the IP

Gateway user‑defined. address or host
name of the
primary SMTP
server.

Primary SMTP 1–65535 (25*) Enter the port

Gateway Port number of the
primary SMTP
server.

Secondary SMTP The setting is Type the IP

Gateway user‑defined. address or host
name of the
secondary SMTP
server.

382
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Secondary SMTP 1–65535 (25*) Enter the server

Gateway Port port number of the
secondary SMTP
server.

SMTP Timeout 5–30 seconds Specify the time

(30*) that the SMTP
server waits before
it stops trying to
send an email.

Reply Address The setting is Specify a reply

user‑defined. address in the
email.

Always use SMTP On Always use the

default Reply default reply
Address Off* address in the
SMTP server.

Use SSL/TLS Disabled* Send an email

using an encrypted
Negotiate link.
Required

Require Trusted On* Require a trusted

Certificate certificate when
Off accessing the
SMTP server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Email Alerts Setup SMTP Server No authentication Set the

Authentication required* authentication type
for the SMTP
Login/Plain server.
NTLM

CRAM-MD5

Digest-MD5

Kerberos 5

Device‑Initiated None* Set whether

Email credentials are
Use Device SMTP required for
Credentials device‑initiated
emails.

383
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

User‑Initiated None* Set whether

Email credentials are
Use Device SMTP required for
Credentials user‑initiated
emails.
Use Session User
ID & Password

Use Session
Email address and
Password

Prompt user

Use Active On Enable user

Directory Device credentials and
Credentials Off* group designations
to connect to the
SMTP server.

Device Userid The setting is Specify the user ID

user‑defined. to log in to the
SMTP server.

Device Password The setting is Specify the

user‑defined. password to log in
to the SMTP server.

Kerberos 5 The setting is Specify the realm

REALM user‑defined. for the Kerberos 5
authentication
protocol.

NTLM Domain The setting is Specify the domain

user‑defined. name for the NTLM
security protocol.

Disable “SMTP On Disable an error

server not set up” message about the
error Off* SMTP server setup.

384
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Setup Email Lists The setting is Specify the email

and Alerts user‑defined. addresses and
enable the email
alert.

Note: This
menu item
appears
only in the
Embedded
Web
Server.

Error Prevention Auto Continue Off Let the printer

continue
On* processing or
printing a job
Auto Continue automatically after
Time clearing certain
attendance
conditions.

Note:
When set
to On, the
default
setting is 5
seconds.

Auto Reboot Reboot when idle Set the printer to

restart when an
Reboot always* error occurs.
Reboot never

Max Auto Reboots 1–20 (2*) Set the number of

automatic reboots
that the printer can
perform.

Auto Reboot 1–525600 (720*) Set the number of

Window seconds before the
printer performs an
automatic reboot.

385
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Auto Reboot The setting is a Show the number

Counter read‑only of automatic
information. reboots that the
printer has
performed.

Display Short On Set the printer to

Paper Error show a message
Auto‑clear* when a short paper
error occurs.

Note: Short
paper
refers to
the size of
the paper
loaded.

Page Protect Off* Set the printer to

process the entire
On page into the
memory before
printing it.

Jam Content Jam Recovery Off Set the printer to

Recovery reprint jammed
On pages.
Auto*

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Power Management

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Sleep Mode Print from Sleep Stay awake after Set the printer to
Profile Mode printing stay awake or enter
Sleep Mode after
Enter Sleep Mode printing.
after printing*

Touch to Wake Off Wake the printer

from Deep Sleep from Deep Sleep
On* Mode.

386
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Timeouts Sleep Mode 1–114 minutes Set the idle time

(15*) before the printer
begins operating in
Sleep Mode.

Hibernate Timeout Disabled Set the time before

the printer turns off.
1 hour

2 hours

3 hours

6 hours

1 day

2 days

3 days*

1 week

2 weeks

1 month

Hibernate Timeout Hibernate Set Hibernate

on Connection Timeout to turn off
Do Not Hibernate* the printer while an
active Ethernet
connection exists.

Schedule Power Schedules Add New Schedule the

Modes Schedule printer when to
enter Sleep Mode
or Hibernate mode.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Share Data with Lexmark

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Share Data with Yes Send printer usage and performance

Lexmark information to Lexmark.
No*

387
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Share Data Send Start Time Select the time window for data collection
Time and transmission.
Stop Time

Note: Share Data Send Time

appears only when you select Yes in
Share Data with Lexmark.

Accessibility

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Duplicate Key 0.00 to 5.00 (0.00*) Set the interval in seconds during which the
Strike Interval printer ignores duplicate key presses on an
attached keyboard.

Key Repeat Initial 0.25 to 5.00 (1.00*) Set the initial length of delay in seconds
Delay before a repeating key starts repeating.

Key Repeat Rate 0.5 to 30.0 (30.0*) Set the number of presses per second for a
repeating key.

Prolong Screen Off* Let the user remain in the same location and
Timeout reset the Screen Timeout timer when it
On expires instead of returning to the home
screen.

Headphone 1 to 10 (5*) Adjust the headphone volume.

Volume

Enable Voice Off* Enable Voice Guidance when headphones

Guidance When are inserted into the headphone jack.
Headphone is On
Attached

Speak Passwords/ Off* Set the printer to read out loud passwords or
PINs personal identification numbers.
On

388
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Speech Rate Very Slow Set the Voice Guidance speech rate.

Slow

Normal*

Fast

Faster

Very Fast

Rapid

Very Rapid

Fastest

Restore Factory Defaults

Menu item Settings Description

Restore Settings Restore all settings Restore the printer factory

default settings.
Restore printer settings

Restore network settings

Restore app settings

Maintenance

Configuration Menu

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

USB USB PnP 1* Change the USB

Configuration driver mode of the
2 printer to improve
its compatibility with
a personal
computer.

USB Speed Full Set the USB port to

run at full speed
Auto* and disable its
high-speed
capabilities.

389
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Tray Size Sensing Tray [x] Sensing Set the tray to

Configuration (On*) sense automatically
the paper size
loaded into it.

Tray Linking Automatic* Set the printer to

link the trays that
Off have the same
paper type and
paper size settings.

Show Tray Insert Off Display a message

Message that lets the user
Only for unknown change the paper
sizes* size and paper type
settings after
Always inserting the tray.

Paper Prompts Auto* Set the paper

source that the user
Multipurpose fills when a prompt
Feeder to load paper
appears.
Manual Paper

Note: For
Multipurpose
Feeder to
appear, in
the Paper
menu, set
Configure
MP to
Cassette.

Envelope Prompts Auto* Set the paper

source that the user
Multipurpose fills when a prompt
Feeder to load envelope
appears.
Manual Envelope

Note: For
Multipurpose
Feeder to
appear, in
the Paper
menu, set
Configure
MP to
Cassette.

390
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Action for Prompt user* Set the printer to

Prompts resolve paper- or
Continue envelope-related
change prompts.
Use current

Multiple Universal Off* Set the tray to

Sizes support multiple
On universal paper
sizes.

Reports N/A Menu Settings Print reports about

Page printer menu
settings, status,
Event Log and event logs.
Event Log
Summary

Supply Usage And Clear Supply Start Reset the supply

Counters Usage History usage history to the
factory shipped
level.

ITM Reset Start Reset the counter

after installing a
Reset Black Start new supply item or
Cartridge Counter maintenance kit.

Reset Cyan Start

Cartridge Counter

Reset Magenta Start

Cartridge Counter

Reset Yellow Start

Cartridge Counter

Reset Black Start

Imaging Unit
Counter

Reset Color Start

Imaging Kit
Counter

Reset MPF Roller Start

Kit Counter

Reset Roller Kit Start

Counter

391
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Tiered Coverage Tiered Coverage Show the Tiered

Ranges Metrics (Show*) Coverage Billing
section on the
Tiered Coverage Device Statistics
Ranges report.

Large Media Off* Allow adjustments

Adjustments when printing for
On large or thick paper.

Printer PPDS Emulation Off* Set the printer to

Emulations recognize and use
On the PPDS data
stream.

PS Emulation Off Set the printer to

recognize and use
On* the PS data stream.

Enable Off* Activate Forms

Formsmerge Merge.
On

Notes
• The
Formsmerge
license
must
be
installed.
• A
user
flash
memory
must
be
installed.

Enable Prescribe Off* Activate the

PRESCRIBE
On printer language.

Note: The
PRESCRIBE
license
must be
installed.

392
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Emulator Security Page Timeout Set the page

(60*) timeout during
emulation.

Reset Emulator Reset the emulator

After Job (Off*) after a print job.

Disable Printer Determine whether

Message Access the emulator can
(On*) access the initial
printer setup or not.

Print Black Only Mode Off* Print non‑copy jobs

Configuration in grayscale.
On

Color Trapping Off Enhance the

printed output to
1 compensate for
misregistration in
2* the printer.
3

Font Sharpening 0–150 (24*) Set a text point-size

value below which
the high-frequency
screens are used
when printing font
data.

For example, if the

value is 24, then all
fonts sized 24
points or less use
the high-frequency
screens.

393
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Use Native ISD On* Let the user choose

Fonts whether to use the
Off free fonts that are
in the intelligent
storage drive (ISD).

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
an ISD is
installed.

Device Operations Quiet Mode Off* Adjust the amount

of noise that the
On printer produces.

Note:
Enabling
this setting
slows down
the overall
performance
of the
printer.

394
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Safe Mode Off* Set the printer to

operate in a special
On mode where it
offers as much
functionality as
possible despite
known issues.

For example, when

set to On and the
duplex motor is
nonfunctional,
one‑sided printing
is performed even if
a job is set to
two‑sided printing.

Note:
Enabling
this setting
allows
printing
only from
the
multipurpose
feeder.

Clear Custom Start Erase user‑defined

Status strings for the
Default or
Alternate custom
messages.

Clear all Start Erase messages

remotely‑installed that were remotely
messages installed.

Automatically Off Show existing error

Display Error messages on the
Screens On* display after the
printer remains
inactive on the
home screen for a
length of time.

Service Encryption Status Show the

Nonvolatile encryption status of
Memory the storage drive.

Encrypt Service Enable mirror

Nonvolatile encryption
Memory manually.

395
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Toner patch Calibration Disabled Set the printer to

sensor setup frequency put down the
preference Fewest color correct amount of
adjustments toner to maintain
color consistency.
Fewer color
adjustments

Normal*

Better color
accuracy

Best color
accuracy

Full calibration Start Run the full color

calibration.

Print TPS Start Print a diagnostic

information page page that contains
information on
toner patch sensor
calibration.

App Configuration LES Applications Off Enable Lexmark

Embedded
On* Solutions (LES)
applications.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Out of Service Erase

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Out of Service Memory Last The setting is a Show when the

Erase Sanitized read‑only printer memory was
information. last erased.

396
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Hard Disk Last The setting is a Show when hard

Sanitized read‑only disk was last
information. erased.

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
a hard disk
is installed.

ISD last erased The setting is a Show when the

read‑only intelligent storage
information. drive (ISD) was last
erased.

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
an ISD is
installed.

Sanitize all Erase all printer Clear all

information on and network information on
nonvolatile settings nonvolatile
memory memory.
Erase all apps and
app settings

Sanitize all Erase downloads Clear all

information on (Erases all information on the
hard disk macros, fonts, hard disk.
PFOs, etc.)

Erase buffered Note: This

jobs menu item
appears
Erase Held Jobs only when
a hard disk
is installed.

397
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Erase Intelligent Cryptographically Clear all

Storage Drive erase all user data information on the
on ISD ISD.

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
an ISD is
installed.

Update firmware

Menu item Settings Description

Current Version The setting is a read‑only Show the current firmware

information. version installed on the
printer.

Check for updates now Install now Check for firmware updates.

Install later

Auto check for updates On Set the printer to check for

firmware updates
Off* automatically.

About this Printer

Menu item Description

Asset Tag Specify the identity of the printer.

Printer’s Location Specify the printer location.

Contact Specify the contact information for the

printer.

Firmware Version Show the firmware version installed on the

printer.

Engine Show the engine number of the printer.

Serial Number Show the serial number of the printer.

Export Configuration File to USB Export the configuration file to a flash drive.

398
Printer menus

Menu item Description

Export Compressed Logs to USB Export the compressed log files to a flash
drive.

Send Logs Send printer log information to Lexmark.

Print
Layout

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Sides 1‑Sided Specify whether to print on one side or both

sides of the paper.
2‑Sided*

Flip Style Long Edge* Determine which side of the paper is bound
when performing two-sided printing.
Short Edge

Blank Pages Print Print blank pages that are included in a print
job.
Do Not Print*

Collate Off (1,1,1,2,2,2) Keep the pages of a print job stacked in

sequence, particularly when printing multiple
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)* copies of the job.

Separator Sheets None* Insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Separator Sheet Tray [x] (1*) Specify the paper source for the separator
Source sheet.
Multipurpose
Feeder

399
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Pages per Side Off* Print multiple page images on one side of a
sheet of paper.
2 pages per side

3 pages per side

4 pages per side

6 pages per side

9 pages per side

12 pages per side

16 pages per side

Pages per Side Horizontal* Specify the positioning of multiple page

Ordering images when using the Pages per Side
Reverse menu.
Horizontal

Vertical

Reverse Vertical

Pages per Side Auto* Specify the orientation of multiple page

Orientation images when using the Pages per Side
Landscape menu.

Portrait

Pages per Side None* Print a border around each page image
Border when using the Pages per Side menu.
Solid

Copies 1 to 9999 (1*) Specify the number of copies for each print
job.

Print Area Normal* Set the printable area on a sheet of paper.

Fit to page

Whole Page

Finishing

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

400
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Staple Job Off* Specify the staple position for all print jobs.

1 staple, top left

corner Note: This menu item appears only
when a staple finisher is installed.
2 staples, left

1 staple, top right

corner

2 staples, top

1 staple, bottom
left corner

2 staples, bottom

1 staple, bottom
right corner

2 staples, right

Staple Test Start Determine whether the staple finisher is

functioning properly.

Note: This menu item appears only

when a staple finisher is installed.

Hole Punch Off* Punch holes along the edge of the printed
output.
On

Note: This menu item appears only

when a staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.

401
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Hole Punch Mode 2 holes Set the hole punch mode for the printed
output.
3 holes

4 holes Notes
• 3 holes is the U.S. factory
default setting. 4 holes is the
international factory default
setting.
• This menu item appears only
when a staple, hole punch
finisher or booklet finisher is
installed.

Offset Pages None* Offset the output of each print job or each
copy of a print job.
Between Copies

Between Jobs Notes

• Between Copies offsets each
copy of a print job if Collate is
set to On [1,2,1,2,1,2]. If
Collate is set to Off
[1,1,1,2,2,2], then each set of
printed pages is offset, such
as all pages designated as 1
and all pages designated as
2.
• Between Jobs sets the same
offset position for the entire
print job regardless of the
number of copies printed.

402
Printer menus

Setup

Menu item Settings Description

Printer Language PCL Emulation Set the printer language.

PS Emulation*
Note: Setting a
printer language
default does not
prevent a software
program from
sending print jobs
that use another
printer language.

Job Waiting Off* Preserve print jobs requiring

supplies so that jobs not
On requiring the missing
supplies can print.

Note: This menu

item appears only
when a storage
drive is installed.

Job Hold Timeout 0–255 (30*) Set the time in seconds that
the printer waits for user
intervention before it holds
jobs that require unavailable
resources.

Note: This menu

item appears only
when a storage
drive is installed.

403
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Download Target RAM* Specify where to save all

permanent resources that
Flash have been downloaded to
the printer.
Disk

Note: This menu

item appears only
when a storage
drive is installed.

Printer Usage Max Speed Determine if the retraction

hardware disengages or
Max Yield* engages the color
developer units during
printing.

Notes
• When set to
Max Yield,
the color
developer
units are
disengaged
when not
needed. This
setting
increases
component
life but can
create
pauses.
• When set to
Max Speed,
the color
developer
units remain
engaged
regardless of
whether a job
contains
mono or color
content. This
setting can
shorten color
component
life.

404
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Low‑Speed Printer Usage Max Yield* Determine if the retraction

hardware disengages or
Max Speed engages the color
developer units during
printing at low speed.

Note: This setting

only changes
printer behavior
when the print
engine is running at
a 25
pages‑per‑minute
process speed. It
has no effect when
the print engine is
running at faster
process speeds.

405
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Resource Save Off* Determine what the printer

does with downloaded
On resources when it receives
a job that requires more
than the available memory.

Notes
• When set to
Off, the
printer retains
downloaded
resources
only until
memory is
needed.
Resources
associated
with the
inactive
printer
language are
deleted.
• When set to
On, the
printer
preserves all
the
permanent
downloaded
resources
across all
language
switches.
When
necessary,
the printer
shows
memory full
messages
instead of
deleting
permanent
resources.

Print All Order Alphabetical* Specify the order when you

choose to print all held and
Newest First confidential jobs.
Oldest First

406
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Automatic Deletion of Off* Set the printer to cancel

Suspended Print Jobs automatically the queued
On print jobs that are
interrupted by errors such
as paper jams and missing
supplies.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Quality

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Print Mode N/A Black and Set how the printer generates color
White content.

Color*

Print N/A 4800 CQ* Set the resolution for the printed
Resolution output.
1200 dpi

Note: 4800 CQ provides

high‑quality output at
maximum speed.

Toner N/A 1 to 5 (4*) Determine the lightness or darkness

Darkness of text images.

Halftone N/A Normal* Enhance the printed output to have

smoother lines with sharper edges.
Detail

Color N/A Off* Reduce the amount of toner used to

Saver print graphics and images.
On

Note: When set to On, this

setting overrides the value
of the Toner Darkness
setting.

407
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

RGB N/A ‑6 to 6 (0*) Adjust the brightness of every RGB

Brightness and gray object on the page.

Note: This setting does not

affect files where CMYK
color specifications are
used.

RGB N/A 0 to 5 (0*) Adjust the contrast of every RGB

Contrast and gray object on the page.

Note: This setting does not

affect files where CMYK
color specifications are
used.

RGB N/A 0 to 5 (0*) Preserve the black and white values

Saturation while adjusting the color values of
every object on the page.

Note: This setting does not

affect files where CMYK
color specifications are
used.

Advanced Color Balance Cyan (0*) Adjust the amount of toner that is
Imaging used for each color.
Magenta
(0*)

Yellow (0*)

Black (0*)

Reset Reset all color settings to their

Defaults default values.

408
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Color Correction Off Modify the color settings that are

used to print documents.
Auto*

Manual Notes
• Off—Sets the printer
to receive the color
correction from the
software.
• Auto—Sets the
printer to apply
different color profiles
to each object on the
printed page.
• Manual—Allows the
customization of the
RGB or CMYK color
conversions applied
to each object on the
printed page.

Color Samples Print Color Print sample pages for each of the
Samples RGB and CMYK color conversion
tables that are used in the printer.

Color Adjust Color Calibrate the printer to adjust color

Adjust variations in the printed output.

Spot Color Set Assign specific CMYK values to 20

Replacement Custom named spot colors.
CMYK

Job Accounting

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Job Accounting Off* Set the printer to create a log of the print
jobs that it receives.
On

Accounting Log Daily Specify how often the printer creates a log
Frequency file.
Weekly

Monthly*

409
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Log Action at End None* Specify how the printer responds when the
of Frequency frequency threshold expires.
Email Current Log

Email & Delete Note: The value defined in

Current Log Accounting Log Frequency
determines when this action is
Post Current Log triggered.
Post & Delete
Current Log

Log Near Full On* (5MB) Specify the maximum size of the log file
Level before the printer executes the Log Action
Off at Near Full.

Note: This menu item appears only

when a storage drive is installed.

Log Action at Near None* Specify how the printer responds when a
Full storage drive is nearly full.
Email Current Log

Email & Delete Note: The value defined in Log

Current Log Near Full Level determines when
this action is triggered.
Email & Delete
Oldest Log

Post Current Log

Post & Delete

Current Log

Post & Delete

Oldest Log

Delete Current
Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All But

Current

Delete All Logs

410
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Log Action at Full None* Specify how the printer responds when a
storage drive usage reaches the maximum
Email & Delete limit (100MB).
Current Log

Email & Delete

Oldest Log

Post & Delete

Current Log

Post & Delete

Oldest Log

Delete Current
Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All But

Current

Delete All Logs

URL to Post Log The setting is user- Specify where the printer posts job
defined. accounting logs.

Email Address to The setting is user- Specify the email address to which the
Send Logs defined. printer sends job accounting logs.

Log File Prefix The setting is user- Specify the prefix for the log files.
defined.

Note: The current host name

defined in the TCP/IP menu is used
as the default log file prefix.

PDF

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Scale To Fit Off* Scale the page content to fit the selected
paper size.
On

Annotations Print Specify whether to print annotations in the

PDF.
Do Not Print*

411
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Print PDF Error Off Enable the printing of PDF error.

On*

PostScript

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Print PS Error Off* Print a page that describes the PostScript®

emulation error.
On

Note: When an error occurs,

processing of the job stops, the
printer prints an error message, and
the rest of the print job is flushed.

Minimum Line 1 to 30 (2*) Set the minimum stroke width.

Width

Note: Jobs printed in 1200 dpi use

the value directly.

Lock PS Startup Off Disable the SysStart file.

Mode
On*
Note: Enabling the SysStart file
exposes your printer or network to a
security risk.

Image Smoothing Off* Enhance the contrast and sharpness of

low‑resolution images.
On

Note: This setting has no effect on

images with a resolution of 300 dpi
or higher.

412
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Font Priority Resident* Establish the font search order.

Flash/Disk
Notes
• Resident—Sets the printer to
search its memory for the
requested font before
searching the storage drive.
• Flash/Disk—Sets the printer
to search the storage drive for
the requested font before
searching the printer memory.
• This menu item appears only
when a storage drive is
installed.

Wait Timeout Off Enable the printer to wait for more data
before canceling a print job.
On*

Note: When set to On, 40 seconds

is the factory default setting.

413
Printer menus

PCL

Menu item Settings Description

Font Source Resident* Select the source which

contains the default font
Disk selection.
Download
Notes
Flash
• Disk—
Font Card appears only
and if a
All
non‑defective,
non‑read/
write
protected
hard disk that
contains fonts
is installed.
• Download—
appears only
if downloaded
fonts exist in
the printer
memory.
• Flash—
appears only
if a
non‑defective,
non‑read/
write
protected
flash memory
that contains
fonts is
installed.
• Font Card—
appears only
if a valid font
card is
installed or an
intelligent
storage drive
is configured.

Font Name [List of available fonts] Select a font from the

(Courier*) specified font source.

414
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Symbol Set [List of available symbol Specify the symbol set for
sets] (10U PC‑8*) each font name.

Note: A symbol set

is a set of
alphabetic and
numeric characters,
punctuation, and
special symbols.
Symbol sets
support the different
languages or
specific programs
such as math
symbols for
scientific text.

Pitch 0.08–100.00 (10.00*) Specify the pitch for fixed or

monospaced fonts.

Note: This menu

item refers to the
number of
fixed‑space
characters in a
horizontal inch of
type.

Orientation Portrait* Specify the orientation of

text and graphics on the
Landscape page.
Reverse Portrait

Reverse Landscape

415
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Lines per Page 1–255 Specify the number of lines

of text for each page printed
through the PCL® data
stream.

Notes
• This menu
item activates
vertical
escapement
that
causes the
selected
number of
requested
lines to print
between the
default
margins of
the page.
• 60 is the U.S.
factory
default
setting. 64 is
the
international
factory
default
setting.

PCL5 Minimum Line 1–30 (2*) Set the initial minimum

Width stroke width value of any
job printed in 1200 dpi
PCLXL Minimum Line 1–30 (2*) through the applicable
Width emulator.

A4 Width 198 mm* Set the width of the logical

page on A4‑size paper.
203 mm

Note: Logical page

is the space on the
physical page
where data is
printed.

416
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Auto CR after LF On Set the printer to perform a

carriage return after a line
Off* feed control command.

Note: Carriage
return is a
mechanism that
commands the
printer to move the
position of the
cursor to the first
position on the
same line.

Auto LF after CR On Set the printer to perform a

line feed after a carriage
Off* return control command.

Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Configure the printer to

work with a different print
Assign Tray [x] driver or custom application
that uses a different set of
Assign Manual Paper source assignments to
request a given paper
Assign Manual Envelope source.

Choose from the following

options:

Off*—The printer uses the

factory default paper source
assignments.
None—The paper source
ignores the Select Paper
Feed command.
0–199—Select a numeric
value to assign a custom
value to a paper source.

View Factory Defaults Show the factory default

value assigned for each
paper source.

Restore Defaults Restore the tray renumber

values to their factory
defaults.

Print Timeout Off Set the printer to end a print

job after it has been idle for
On* (90) the specified amount of
time.

417
Printer menus

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Image

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Auto Fit On Select the best available paper size and

orientation setting for an image.
Off*

Note: When set to On, this menu

item overrides the scaling and
orientation settings for the image.

Invert Off* Invert bitonal monochrome images.

On
Note: This menu item does not
apply to GIF or JPEG image
formats.

Scaling Best Fit* Adjust the image to fit the printable area.

Anchor Top Left

Note: When Auto Fit is set to On,
Anchor Center Scaling is automatically set to Best
Fit.
Fit Height/Width

Fit Height

Fit Width

Orientation Portrait* Specify the orientation of text and graphics

on the page.
Landscape

Reverse Portrait

Reverse
Landscape

418
Printer menus

Paper
Tray Configuration

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Default N/A Tray [x] Set the default paper source for all
Source (1*) print jobs.

Multipurpose
Feeder

Manual
Paper

Manual
Envelope

Paper Tray [x] Size Specify the paper size or paper type
Size/Type loaded in each paper source.
Multipurpose Type
Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Substitute N/A Off Set the printer to substitute a

Size specified paper size if the requested
Statement/ size is not loaded in any paper
A5 source.
Letter/A4
Notes
11 x 17/A3
• Off—Prompts the
All Listed* user to load the
required paper size.
• All Listed—Allows all
available
substitutions.

419
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Configure N/A Cassette* Determine the behavior of the

MP multipurpose feeder.
Manual

First Notes
• Cassette—
Configures the
multipurpose feeder
as the automatic
paper source.
• Manual—Sets the
multipurpose feeder
only for manual-feed
print jobs.
• First—Configures the
multipurpose feeder
as the primary paper
source.

Media Configuration

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Units of Measure N/A Inches Specify the unit of

measurement for
Millimeters the universal paper.

Note:
Inches is
the U.S.
factory
default
setting.
Millimeters
is the
international
factory
default
setting.

Universal Setup All Input Trays Portrait Width Set the portrait
width of the
universal paper.

420
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Portrait Height Set the portrait

height of the
universal paper.

Feed Direction Set the printer to

(Short Edge*) pick paper from the
short edge or long
edge direction.

Note: Long
Edge
appears
only when
the longest
edge is
shorter
than the
maximum
width
supported.

Media Type Setup [List of paper types] Texture Specify the texture,
weight, and
Weight orientation of the
paper.
Loading
Orientation

Send to Bin

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Bin Configuration

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Output Bin Standard Bin* Specify the output bin for the print jobs.

Bin [x]

421
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Configure Bins Mailbox* Configure the mode of operation for the

output bins.
Link

Link Optional Notes

Type Assignment • Mailbox—Allows the standard
bin and any optional bin to be
selected individually.
• Link—Allows all output bins to
be linked together as though
they were one large bin.
• Link Optional—Treats all
optional bins as one large
output bin.
• Type Assignment—Assigns
each paper type a bin or a
linked bin set.

Custom Bin Standard Bin Assign a name for each bin.

Names
Bin [x]

USB Drive
Flash Drive Print

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Number of Copies 1 to 9999 (1*) Set the number of copies in a print job.

Paper Source Tray [x] (1*) Set the paper source for the print job.

Multipurpose
Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Color Off Print the flash drive file in color.

On*

422
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Collate Off [1,1,1,2,2,2] Keep the pages of a print job stacked in

sequence, particularly when printing multiple
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]* copies of the job.

Sides 1‑Sided* Specify whether to print on one side or both

sides of the paper.
2‑Sided

Staple Off* Specify the staple position for all print jobs.

1 staple, top left

corner Note: Staple appears only when a
staple finisher is installed.
2 staples, left

1 staple, top right

corner

2 staples, top

1 staple, bottom
left corner

2 staples, bottom

1 staple, bottom
right corner

2 staples, right

Hole Punch Off* Set the punch mode for all print jobs.

2 holes
Note: This menu item appears only
3 holes when a staple, hole punch finisher
or booklet finisher is installed.
4 holes

423
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Offset Pages None* Offset the output of each print job or each
copy of a print job.
Between Copies

Between Jobs Notes

• Between Copies—Offsets
each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to On
[1,2,1,2,1,2]. If Collate is set
to Off [1,1,1,2,2,2], then each
set of printed pages is offset,
such as all pages designated
as 1 and all pages designated
as 2.
• Between Jobs—Sets the
same offset position for the
entire print job regardless of
the number of copies printed.

Flip Style Long Edge* Determine which side of the paper is bound
when performing two-sided printing.
Short Edge

Pages per Side Off* Print multiple page images on one side of a
sheet of paper.
2 pages per side

3 pages per side

4 pages per side

6 pages per side

9 pages per side

12 pages per side

16 pages per side

Pages per Side Horizontal* Specify the positioning of multiple page

Ordering images when using the Pages per Side
Reverse menu.
Horizontal

Reverse Vertical

Vertical

Pages per Side Auto* Specify the orientation of multiple page

Orientation images when using the Pages per Side
Landscape menu.
Portrait

424
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Pages per Side None* Print a border around each page image
Border when using the Pages per Side menu.
Solid

Separator Sheets Off* Insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Separator Sheet Tray [x] (1*) Specify the paper source for the separator
Source sheet.
Multipurpose
Feeder

Blank Pages Do Not Print* Print blank pages in a print job.

Print

Network/Ports
Network Overview

Menu item Settings Description

Active Adapter Auto* Specify the type of the

network connection.
Standard Network

Wireless Note: Wireless is

available only in
printers connected
to a wireless
network.

Network Status The setting is a read‑only Show the connectivity

information. status of the printer
network.

Display Network Status Off Show the network status on

on Printer the display.
On*

Speed, Duplex The setting is a read‑only Show the speed of the

information. currently active network
card.

IPv4 The setting is a read‑only Show the IPv4 address.

information.

425
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

All IPv6 Addresses The setting is a read‑only Show all the IPv6
information. addresses.

Reset Print Server Start Reset all active network

connections to the printer.

Note: This setting

removes all network
configuration
settings.

Network Job Timeout Off Set the time before the

printer cancels a network
On* (90 seconds) print job.

Banner Page Off* Print a banner page.

On

Enable Network Off Enable the printer to

Connections connect to a network.
On*

Enable LLDP Off* Show the network status on

the home screen.
On

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Wireless

Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a Wi‑Fi network or

printers that have a wireless network adapter.

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Setup On Printer Choose Network [List of available Determine the

Panel wireless networks] wireless network
that the printer
connects to.

426
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Add Wi‑Fi Network Name Manually enter a

Network network name and
Network Mode network type.
(Infrastructure*)

Wireless Security
Mode (Disabled*)

427
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Wi‑Fi Protected N/A Start Push Button Establish a Wi‑Fi

Setup Method network and enable
network security.
Start PIN Method

428
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Notes
• Start
Push-
Button
Method
connects
the
printer
to a
Wi‑Fi
network
when
buttons
on
both
the
printer
and
the
access
point
(wireless
router)
are
pressed
within
a
given
time.

429
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

• Start
PIN
Method
connects
the
printer
to a
Wi‑Fi
network
when
a PIN
on
the
printer
is
entered
into
the
wireless
settings
of the
access
point.

Network Mode N/A BSS Type Specify the network

mode.
Infrastructure*

Compatibility N/A 802.11b/g/n Specify the

(2.4GHz)* standard for the
Wi‑Fi network.
802.11a/b/g/n/ac
(2.4GHz/5GHz)
Note:
802.11a/n/ac 802.11a/b/
(5GHz) g/n/ac
(2.4GHz/
5GHz) and
802.11a/n/
ac (5GHz)
appear only
when a
Wi‑Fi
option is
installed.

430
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Wireless Security N/A Disabled* Set the security

Mode mode for
WPA2/WPA- connecting the
Personal printer to Wi‑Fi
devices.
WPA2-Personal

WPA3/WPA-
Personal

WPA3-Personal

802.1x - RADIUS

WPA2/WPA N/A AES Enable Wi‑Fi

Personal security through
Wi-Fi Protected
Access (WPA).

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
the
Wireless
Security
Mode is set
to WPA2/
WPA-
Personal.

Set PSK N/A The setting is user- Set the password

defined. for a secure Wi‑Fi
connection.

WPA2-Personal N/A AES Enable Wi‑Fi

security through
WPA2.

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
the
Wireless
Security
Mode is set
to WPA2-
Personal.

431
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

802.1x Encryption N/A WPA+ Enable Wi‑Fi

Mode security through the
WPA2* 802.1x standard.

Notes
• This
menu
item
appears
only
when
the
Wireless
Security
Mode
is set
to
802.1x
-
RADIUS.
• 802.1x
-
RADIUS
can
be
configured
only
from
the
Embedded
Web
Server.

IPv4 Enable DHCP On* Enable and

configure the IPv4
Off settings in the
printer.
Set Static IP IP Address
Address
Netmask

Gateway

IPv6 Enable IPv6 On* Enable and

configure the IPv6
Off settings in the
printer.
Enable DHCPv6 On

Off*

432
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Stateless Address On*

Autoconfiguration
Off

DNS Server The setting is

Address user‑defined.

Manually The setting is

Assigned IPv6 user‑defined.
Address

Manually The setting is

Assigned IPv6 user‑defined.
Router

Address Prefix The setting is

user‑defined.

All IPv6 The setting is

Addresses user‑defined.

All IPv6 Router The setting is

Addresses user‑defined.

Network Address N/A UAA View the network

addresses.
LAA

433
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

PCL SmartSwitch N/A Off Set the printer to

switch
On* automatically to
PCL emulation
when a print job
requires it,
regardless of the
default printer
language.

Note: If
PCL
SmartSwitch
is set to
Off, then
the printer
does not
examine
incoming
data and
uses the
default
printer
language
specified in
the Setup
menu.

434
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

PS SmartSwitch N/A Off Set the printer to

switch
On* automatically to PS
emulation when a
print job requires it,
regardless of the
default printer
language.

Note: If PS
SmartSwitch
is set to
Offoff, then
the printer
does not
examine
incoming
data and
uses the
default
printer
language
specified in
the Setup
menu.

Job Buffering N/A On Temporarily store

print jobs in the
Off* storage drive
before printing.

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
a storage
device is
installed.

435
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Mac Binary PS N/A Auto* Set the printer to

process Macintosh
On binary PostScript
emulation print
Off jobs.

Notes
• On
processes
raw
binary
PostScript
emulation
print
jobs.
• Off
filters
print
jobs
using
the
standard
protocol.

Wi‑Fi Direct

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Enable Wi‑Fi On Set the printer to connect directly to Wi-Fi

Direct devices.
Off*

Wi‑Fi Direct Name The setting is Specify the name of the Wi‑Fi Direct
user‑defined. network.

Wi‑Fi Direct The setting is Set the password to authenticate and

Password user‑defined. validate users on a Wi‑Fi connection.

Show Password Off Show the Wi‑Fi Direct Password on the

on Setup Page Network Setup Page.
On*

436
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Preferred Channel 1 to 11 Set the preferred channel of the Wi‑Fi

Number network.
Auto*

Group Owner IP The setting is Specify the IP address of the group owner.
Address user‑defined.

Auto‑Accept Push Off* Accept requests to connect to the network

Button Requests automatically.
On

Note: Accepting clients

automatically is not secured.

Mobile Services Management

Menu item Settings Description

Enable IPP Print On* Enable a network printer to

print jobs using Internet
Off Printing Protocol (IPP).

Enable IPP Over USB On* Enable a USB printer to

print jobs using IPP.
Off

Note: IPP is
normally designed
for network printers.

Enable Mopria Discovery On* Enable mobile devices to

discover a Mopria™
Off certified printer.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Ethernet

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Network Speed N/A The setting is a Show the speed of

read-only the active network
information. adapter.

437
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

IPv4 Enable DHCP On* Configure the IPv4

settings.
Off

Set Static IP IP Address Note: The

Address settings are
Netmask user‑defined.
Gateway

IPv6 Enable IPv6 On* Configure the IPv6

settings.
Off

Enable DHCPv6 Off*

On

Stateless Address On*

Autoconfiguration
Off

DNS Server The setting is user-

Address defined.

Manually The setting is user-

Assigned IPv6 defined.
Address

Manually The setting is user-

Assigned IPv6 defined.
Router

Address Prefix 0–128 (64*)

All IPv6 The setting is a

Addresses read-only
information.

All IPv6 Router The setting is a

Addresses read-only
information.

Network Address N/A UAA Specify the network

address.
LAA

438
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

PCL SmartSwitch N/A Off Set the printer to

switch
On* automatically to
PCL emulation
when a print job
requires it,
regardless of the
default printer
language.

Note:
When this
setting is
disabled,
the printer
does not
examine
incoming
data and
uses the
default
printer
language
specified in
the Setup
menu.

439
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

PS SmartSwitch N/A Off Set the printer to

switch
On* automatically to
PostScript
emulation when a
print job requires it,
regardless of the
default printer
language.

Note:
When this
setting is
disabled,
the printer
does not
examine
incoming
data and
uses the
default
printer
language
specified in
the Setup
menu.

Job Buffering N/A Off* Temporarily store

jobs on the storage
On drive before
printing.

Note: This
menu item
appears
only when
a storage
drive is
installed.

440
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Mac Binary PS N/A Auto* Set the printer to

process Macintosh
Off binary PostScript
emulation print
On jobs.

Notes
• Auto
processes
print
jobs
from
computers
using
either
Windows
or
Macintosh
operating
systems.
• Off
filters
PostScript
emulation
print
jobs
using
the
standard
protocol.

Energy Efficient N/A On Reduce power

Ethernet consumption when
Off the printer does not
receive data from
Auto* the Ethernet
network.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

441
Printer menus

TCP/IP

Notes

• This menu appears only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
• An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Set Hostname The setting is Set the current TCP/IP host name.
user‑defined.

Domain Name The setting is Set the domain name.

user‑defined.

Allow DHCP/ On* Allow the Dynamic Host Configuration

BOOTP to update Protocol (DHCP) and BOOTstrap Protocol
NTP server Off (BOOTP) clients to update the NTP settings
of the printer.

Zero The setting is Specify a service name for the zero

Configuration user‑defined. configuration network.
Name

Enable Auto IP Off Assign an IP address automatically.

On*

DNS Server The setting is Specify the current Domain Name System
Address user‑defined. (DNS) server address.

Backup DNS The setting is Specify the backup DNS server addresses.
Server Address user‑defined.

Backup DNS
Server Address 2

Backup DNS
Server Address 3

Domain Search The setting is Specify a list of domain names to locate the
Order user‑defined. printer and its resources that reside in
different domains on the network.

Enable DDNS Off* Update the Dynamic DNS settings.

On

DDNS TTL The setting is Specify the current DDNS settings.

user‑defined.
Default TTL

442
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

DDNS Refresh
Time

Enable mDNS Off Update the multicast DNS settings.

On*

WINS Server The setting is Specify a server address for Windows

Address user‑defined. Internet Name Service (WINS).

Enable BOOTP Off* Allow the BOOTP to assign a printer IP

address.
On

Restricted Server The setting is Specify the IP addresses that are allowed to
List user‑defined. communicate with the printer over TCP/IP.

Notes
• Use a comma to separate
each IP address.
• You can add up to 50 IP
addresses.

Restricted Server Block All Ports* Specify the access option for IP addresses
List Options that are not in the list.
Block Printing
Only

Block Printing and

HTTP Only

MTU 256 to 1500 Specify a maximum transmission unit (MTU)

Ethernet (1500*) parameter for the TCP connections.

Raw Print Port 1 to 65535 (9100*) Specify a raw port number for printers
connected on a network.

Outbound Traffic Off* Set the maximum transfer rate of the printer.
Maximum Speed
On
Note: When enabled, the option for
this setting is 100–1000000 Kilobits/
second.

443
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

TLS Support Enable TLSv1.0 Enable the Transport Layer Security

(Off*) protocol.

Enable TLSv1.1
(Off*)

Enable TLSv1.2
(On*)

SSL Cipher List The setting is user- Specify the cipher algorithms to use for the
defined. SSL or the TLS connections.
TLSv1.3 SSL
Cipher List

SNMP

Notes

• This menu appears only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
• An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Submenu Item Settings Description

SNMP Enabled Off Configure Simple Network

Versions 1 and Management Protocol
2c On* (SNMP) versions 1 and 2c to
install print drivers and
Allow SNMP Off applications.
Set
On*

Enable PPM Off

MIB
On*

SNMP The setting is

Community user-defined.

SNMP Version Enabled Off Enable the SNMP version 3 to

3 install and update the printer
On* security.

Context Name The setting is Enter the context name.

user‑defined.

444
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu Item Settings Description

Set Read/Write Username Enter the read and write

Credentials credentials for SNMP version
Authentication 3.
Password

Privacy
Password

Set Read‑only Username Enter the read‑only

Credentials credentials for SNMP version
Authentication 3.
Password

Privacy
Password

Authentication MD5 Set the applicable

Hash authentication hash.
SHA1*

Minimum No Set the applicable minimum

Authentication Authentication, authentication level.
Level No Privacy

Authentication,
No Privacy

Authentication,
Privacy*

Privacy DES Set the applicable privacy

Algorithm algorithm.
AES‑128*

IPSec

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to
print servers.

Menu item Settings Description

Enable IPSec Off* Enable Internet Protocol

Security (IPSec).
On

445
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Base Configuration Default* Set the IPSec base

configuration.
Compatibility

Secure Note: This menu

item appears only
when Enable IPSec
is set to On.

DH (Diffie‑Hellman) Group modp2048 (14)* Set the IPSec base

Proposal configuration.
modp3072 (15)

modp4096 (16) Note: This menu

item appears only
modp6144 (17) when Base
Configuration is
set to
Compatibility.

Proposed Encryption 3DES Set the encryption method.

Method
AES*
Note: This menu
item appears only
when Base
Configuration is
set to
Compatibility.

Proposed Authentication SHA1 Set the authentication

Method method.
SHA256*

SHA512 Note: This menu

item appears only
when Base
Configuration is
set to
Compatibility.

446
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

IKE SA Lifetime (Hours) 1 Specify the IKE SA expiry

period.
2

4 Note: This menu

item appears only
8 when Base
Configuration is
24*
set to Secure.

IPSec SA Lifetime (Hours) 1 Specify the IPSec SA expiry

period.
2

4 Note: This menu

item appears only
8 when Base
Configuration is
24*
set to Secure.

IPSec Device Certificate default* Specify an IPSec certificate.

Note: This menu

item appears only
when Enable IPSec
is set to On.

Pre‑Shared Key Host [x] Configure the authenticated

Authenticated connections of the printer.
Connections

Certificate Authenticated Host [x] Address[/subnet] Note: These menu

Connections items appear only
when Enable IPSec
is set to On.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

447
Printer menus

802.1x

Notes

• This menu appears only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
• An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Submenu Settings Description

Items

Active N/A Off* Let the printer join networks

that require authentication
On before allowing access.

802.1x Device Login The setting is Specify the unique login

Authentication Name user-defined. name.

Device Login The setting is Specify the unique password.

Password user-defined.

Validate Server On* Enable this option to require

Certificate verification of the security
Off certificate on the
authenticating server.

Enable Event On Enable the printer to record

Logging connection logs.
Off*

802.1x Device default* Select the digital certificate

Certificate that you want to use.

Note: If only one

certificate is installed,
then default is the
only option that
appears.

Authentication EAP ‑ MD5 On* Enable the Extensible

Mechanism Authentication Protocol (EAP)
Off MD5 framework.

EAP - On* Enable the EAP Microsoft

MSCHAPv2 Challenge Handshake
Off Authentication Protocol
(MSCHAP) version 2
authentication method.

448
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu Settings Description

Items

LEAP On* Enable Lightweight Extensible

Authentication Protocol
Off (LEAP), a modified version of
MSCHAP.

PEAP On* Enable Protected Extensible

Authentication Protocol
Off (PEAP), a method that
provides more secure
authentication for 802.11
WLANs. PEAP supports
802.1x port access control.

EAP - TLS On* Enable EAP Transport Layer

Security (TLS), a protocol in
Off which the client and server
authenticate each other using
digital certificates.

EAP - TTLS On* Enable EAP tunneled

Transport Layer Security
Off (TLS), a protocol similar to
EAP_TLS except that only the
server has a certificate to
authenticate itself to the client
first.

TTLS CHAP Select which EAP TTLS

Authentication method to use for your device.
Method MSCHAP

MSCHAPv2*

PAP

LPD Configuration

Notes

• This menu appears only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
• An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

LPD Timeout 0 to 665535 Set the timeout value to stop the Line Printer
seconds (90*) Daemon (LPD) server from waiting
indefinitely for hung or invalid print jobs.

449
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

LPD Banner Page Off* Print a banner page for all LPD print jobs.

On
Note: A banner page is the first
page of a print job used as a
separator of print jobs and to identify
the originator of the print job
request.

LPD Trailer Page Off* Print a trailer page for all LPD print jobs.

On
Note: A trailer page is the last page
of a print job.

LPD Carriage Off* Enable carriage return conversion.

Return
Conversion On
Note: Carriage return is a
mechanism that commands the
printer to move the position of the
cursor to the first position on the
same line.

HTTP/FTP Settings

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Submenu Item Settings Description

Proxy HTPP Proxy IP The setting Configure the HTTP server settings.
Address is user-
defined.

HTTP Default IP The setting Configure the HTTP default IP port

Port is user- address.
defined.

Note: The factory default

port for HTTP is 80.

450
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu Item Settings Description

FTP Proxy IP The setting Configure the FTP settings.

Address is user-
defined.

FTP Default IP The setting Configure the FTP default IP port

Port is user- address.
defined.

Note: The factory default

port for HTTP is 21.

Authentication None Specify the authentication

credentials.
Auto*

Basic

Digest

NTLM

Username The setting Specify the unique username.

is user-
defined.

Password The setting Specify the unique password.

is user-
defined.

Local Domains The setting Specify domain names for HTTP

is user- and FTP servers.
defined.

Other Enable HTTP On* Access the Embedded Web Server

Settings Server to monitor and manage the printer.
Off

Enable HTPPS On* Enable Hypertext Transfer Protocol

Secure (HTTPS) to encrypt data
Off transferring to and from the print
server.

Force HTTPS On Force the printer to use HTTPS

Connections connections.
Off*

Enable FTP/TFTP On* Send files using FTP/TFTP.

Off

HTTPS Device default* View the HTTP device certificate

Certificate used on the printer.

451
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu Item Settings Description

Timeout for HTTP/ 1 to Specify the amount of time before

FTP Requests 299 seconds the server connection stops.
(30*)

Retries for HTTP/ 1 to Set the number of retries to connect

FTP Requests 299 seconds to the HTTP/FTP server.
(3*)

ThinPrint

Menu item Settings Description

Enable ThinPrint Off* Print using ThinPrint.

On

Port Number 4000–4999 (4000*) Set the port number for the
ThinPrint server.

Bandwidth (bits/sec) 100–1000000 (0*) Set the speed to transmit

data in a ThinPrint
environment.

Packet Size (kbytes) 0–64000 (0*) Set the packet size for data
transmission.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

USB

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

PCL SmartSwitch Off Set the printer to switch to PCL emulation

when a print job received through a USB
On* port requires it, regardless of the default
printer language.

Note: When this setting is disabled,

the printer does not examine
incoming data and uses the default
printer language specified in the
Setup menu.

452
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

PS SmartSwitch Off Set the printer to switch to PostScript

emulation when a print job received through
On* a USB port requires it, regardless of the
default printer language.

Note: When this setting is disabled,

the printer does not examine
incoming data and uses the default
printer language specified in the
Setup menu.

Job Buffering Off* Temporarily store jobs on the storage drive

before printing.
On

Note: This menu item appears only

when a storage drive is installed.

Mac Binary PS Auto* Set the printer to process Macintosh binary

PostScript emulation print jobs.
On

Off Notes
• Auto—Processes print jobs
from computers using either
Windows or Macintosh
operating systems.
• Off—Filters PostScript
emulation print jobs using the
standard protocol.

Enable USB Port Off Enable the front and rear USB ports.

On*

Restrict external network access

Menu item Settings Description

Restrict external network Off* Restrict access to network

access sites.
On

453
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

External network address The setting is user-defined. Specify the network

addresses with restricted
access.

Email address for The setting is user-defined. Specify an email address to

notification send a notification of logged
events.

Ping frequency 1–300 (10*) Specify the network query

interval in seconds.

Subject The setting is user-defined. Specify the subject and

message of the notification
Message email.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

454
Printer menus

Security
Login Methods

Manage Permissions

Menu item Settings Description

Function Access Access Address Book in Specify the printer functions

Apps that the user can access.

Modify Address Book

Note: Some menu
Manage Shortcuts items appear only
when a storage
Create Profiles drive is installed.
Manage Bookmarks

Flash Drive Print

Flash Drive Color Printing

Held Jobs Access

Use Profiles

Cancel Jobs at the Device

Change Language

Internet Printing Protocol

(IPP)

Initiate Scans Remotely

B/W Print

Color Print

455
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Administrative Menus Security Menu Control access to the printer

menu settings.
Network/Ports Menu

Paper Menu

Reports Menu

Function Configuration
Menus

Supplies Menu

Option Card Menu

SE Menu

Device Menu

Device Management Remote Management Specify the Device

Management functions that
Firmware Updates the user can access.
Apps Configuration

Embedded Web Server

Access

Import / Export All

Settings

Out of Service Erase

Cloud Services
Enrollment

Apps New Apps Control access to the printer

apps.
Slideshow

Change Wallpaper

Screen Saver

Local Accounts

Menu item Submenu Item Settings Description

Manage Add Group The setting Specify the groups that have access
Groups/ is user- to printer functions, administrative
Permissions defined. menus, printer management
options, and apps.

456
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu Item Settings Description

All Users Import Import access controls from

Access accounts enrolled in the printer.
Controls

Add User Username/ The setting Add a user and specify the login
Password is user- method to the printer.
defined.
Username

Password

PIN

Default Login Methods

Note: This menu appears only when the Local Accounts menu is configured.

Menu item Settings Description

Control Panel Username/ Specify the default login method to access

Password the control panel.

Username

Password

PIN

Browser Username/ Specify the default login method to access

Password the browser.

Username

Password

PIN

Schedule USB Devices

Menu item Submenu items Settings Description

Schedules Add New Save Schedule access to the front USB

Schedule Schedule port.

Action

Day(s)

Time

457
Printer menus

Security Audit Log

Menu item Settings Description

Enable Audit Off* Set the printer to record the

events in the secure audit
On log and remote syslog.

Enable Remote Syslog Off* Set the printer to send audit

logs to a remote server.
On

Remote Syslog Server The setting is user-defined. Specify the remote syslog
server.

Remote Syslog Port 1–65535 (514*) Specify the port over which
the printer sends logged
events to a remote server.

Remote Syslog Method Normal UDP* Identify the protocol that the
printer uses to transmit
Stunnel logged events to a remote
server.

458
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Remote Syslog Facility 0 ‑ Kernel Messages Specify a Facility value that

the printer uses when
1 ‑ User‑Level Messages sending log events to the
remote syslog server.
2 ‑ Mail System

3 ‑ System Daemons

4 ‑ Security/Authorization
Messages*

5 ‑ Messages Generated
Internally by Syslogs

6 ‑ Line Printer
Subsystem

7 ‑ Network News
Subsystem

8 ‑ UUCP Subsystem

9 ‑ Clock Daemon

10 ‑ Security/
Authorization Messages

11 ‑ FTP Daemon

12 ‑ NTP Subsystem

13 ‑ Log Audit

14 ‑ Log Alert

15 ‑ Clock Daemon

16 ‑ Local Use 0 (local0)

17‑ Local Use 1 (local1)

18 ‑ Local Use 2 (local2)

19 ‑ Local Use 3 (local3)

20 ‑ Local Use 4 (local4)

21 ‑ Local Use 5 (local5)

22 ‑ Local Use 6 (local6)

23 ‑ Local Use 7 (local7)

459
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Severity of Events to Log 0 ‑ Emergency Specify the severity value of

each event.
1 ‑ Alert

2 ‑ Critical

3 ‑ Error

4 ‑ Warning*

5 ‑ Notice

6 ‑ Informational

7 ‑ Debug

Remote Syslog Off* Set the printer to send any

Non‑Logged Events applicable events.
On

Admin’s Email Address The setting is user-defined. Specify the email address
of the printer administrator
that are notified of certain
log events.

Email Log Cleared Alert Off* Set the printer to send an

email to the administrator
On every time a log is deleted.

Email Log Wrapped Alert Off* Set the printer to send the
administrator an email when
On log entries are wrapping.

Log Full Behaviorr Wrap Over Oldest Entries* Determine how the printer
resolves log storage issues
Email Log Then Delete All when the log fills its allotted
Entries memory.

Email % Full Alert Off* Set the printer to send the

administrator an email when
On the log fills its allotted
memory.

% Full Alert Level 1–99 (90*) Determine if the space

occupied by the log equals
or exceeds the value of the
full alert level.

Email Log Exported Alert Off* Send an email notification

to the administrator when a
On log is exported.

460
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Email Log Settings Off* Set the printer to send an

Changed Alert email to the administrator
On when the value of the
Enable Audit menu is
changed.

Log Line Endings LF (\n)* Determine how the printer

handles line endings in the
CR (\r) log file, depending on the
operating system that the
CRLF (\r\n) file is parsed or viewed.

Digitally Sign Exports Off* Set the printer to sign

exported security logs
On automatically.

Clear Log The setting is user-defined. Delete all audit logs.

Export Log Syslog (RFC 5424) Export logs from the printer
or flash drive.
Syslog (RFC 3164)

CSV

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Login Restrictions

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Login failures 1 to 10 (3*) Specify the number of failed login attempts

before the user is locked out.

Failure time frame 1 to 60 minutes Specify the time frame that failed login
(5*) attempts are allowed before the user is
locked out.

Lockout time 1 to 60 minutes Specify the amount of time where no logins

(5*) are allowed.

Web Login 1 to 120 minutes Specify the amount of time that a remote
Timeout (10*) interface such as a web page can remain
idle before the user is logged off
automatically.

461
Printer menus

Confidential Print Setup

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Max Invalid PIN 2 to 10 Set the limit for entering an invalid PIN.

Note: When the limit is reached, the

print jobs for that username are
deleted.

Confidential Job Off* Set an individual expiration time for each

Expiration type of held job before the printer deletes it
1 Hour automatically from memory.
4 Hours
Notes
24 Hours
• The types of held jobs are
72 Hours Confidential, Repeat,
Reserve, and Verify.
1 Week
• If the expiration time setting is
changed while confidential
print jobs reside on the printer
memory or hard disk, then the
expiration time for those print
jobs does not change to the
new default value.
• If the printer is turned off, then
all confidential jobs held in the
printer memory are deleted.

Repeat Job Off* Set the expiration time for print jobs that you
Expiration want to repeat.
1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

72 Hours

1 Week

462
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Verify Job Off* Set the expiration time for printing a copy of
Expiration a job for you to check its quality before
1 Hour printing the remaining copies.
4 Hours

24 Hours

72 Hours

1 Week

Reserve Job Off* Set the expiration time for jobs that you want
Expiration to store in the printer for printing later.
1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

72 Hours

1 Week

Require All Jobs Off* Set the printer to hold all print jobs.
to be Held
On

Keep duplicate Off* Set the printer to keep all documents with
documents the same file name.
On

Encryption

Menu item Settings Description

Internal Storage The setting is a Show the encryption status of the internal
read‑only storage.
information.

Hard Disk The setting is a Show the encryption status of the hard disk.
read‑only
information.
Note: This menu item appears only
when a hard disk is installed.

463
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Intelligent Storage The setting is a Show the encryption status of the intelligent
Drive read‑only storage drive (ISD).
information.

Note: This menu item appears only

when an ISD is installed.

Erase Temporary Data Files

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Stored in onboard Off* Set the printer to erase all the data of a job
memory from its memory after the job is finished.
On

Stored on hard 1 Pass Erase* Specify the method that the printer uses to
disk erase all the data of a job from the hard disk
3 Pass Erase after the job is finished.
7 Pass Erase
Note: This menu item appears only
when a hard disk is installed.

Solutions LDAP Settings

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Settings Description

Follow LDAP Off* Search the different servers in the domain

Referrals for the logged-in user account.
On

LDAP Certificate Yes Enable verification of LDAP certificates.

Verification
No*

464
Printer menus

Miscellaneous

Menu item Settings Description

Protected Features Show* Show all the features that

Function Access Control
Hide (FAC) protects regardless of
the security permission that
the user has.

Note: Hide displays

only FAC‑protected
features that the
user has access.

Print Permission Off* Require the user to log in

before printing.
On

Default Print Permission Username/Password* Set the default login for

Login Print Permission.
Username

Security Reset Jumper Enable “Guest” access* Specify user access to the
printer.
No Effect

Notes
• Enable
“Guest”
access gives
anyone
access to all
aspects of the
printer.
• No Effect
may make
access to the
printer
impossible
when the
required
security
information is
unavailable.

465
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Use Intelligent Storage Off Enable the intelligent

Drive for User Data storage drive to store user
On* data.

Note: This menu

item is disabled
when a hard disk is
installed.

Minimum Password 0–32 (0*) Specify the minimum

Length password length that is
used for internal accounts
such as Password and
Username/Password
accounts.

Enable Password/PIN Off Show the password or

Reveal personal identification
On* number.

Allow Encryption of Off* Enable the encryption of

Service Nonvolatile service nonvolatile memory
Memory On in your device.

Note: This setting is

available if Encrypt
Service
Nonvolatile
Memory is
disabled.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Cloud Services
Cloud Services Enrollment

Menu item Settings Description

View More Information The setting is a read-only View more information on

information. the usage of Lexmark Cloud
Services.

466
Printer menus

Menu item Settings Description

Enable communication Off* Enable the printer to

with Lexmark Cloud communicate with Lexmark
Services On Cloud Services.

View Current Status The setting is a read-only View the connection status
information. between the printer and
Lexmark Cloud Services.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Reports
Menu Settings Page

Menu item Description

Menu Settings Page Print a report that contains the printer

menus.

Device

Menu item Description

Device Information Print a report that contains information about

the printer.

Device Statistics Print a report about supply status, paper

count, job information, and more.

Profiles List Print a list of profiles that are stored in the

printer.

Asset Report Print a diagnostic tool for print problems.

Note: To avoid clipping the content,

print the report on letter‑ or A4‑size
paper.

467
Printer menus

Print

Menu item Settings Description

Print Fonts PCL Fonts Print samples and information about the
fonts that are available in each printer
PS Fonts language.

Print Demo Demo Page Print a diagnostic tool for print problems.

Notes
• To avoid clipping the content,
print the report on letter‑ or
A4‑size paper.
• This menu item appears only
when the printer has a demo
page installed.

Print Directory The setting is user- Print a report that shows the resources that
defined. are stored in the flash drive or hard disk.

Network

Menu item Description

Network Setup Page Print a page that shows the configured

network and wireless settings on the printer.

Note: This menu item appears only

in network printers or printers
connected to print servers.

Wi‑Fi Direct Connected Clients Print a page that shows the list of devices
that are connected to the printer using Wi‑Fi
Direct.

Note: This menu item appears only

when Enable Wi‑Fi Direct is set to
On.

468
Printer menus

Troubleshooting
Menu item Description

Print Quality Test Pages Print sample pages to identify and correct
print quality defects.

Forms Merge

Notes

• This menu item appears only when a storage drive is installed.

• An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Merge Mode N/A Print* Specify the mode of operation

for Forms Merge.
Data Capture

Disabled

Data Capture N/A Flash* Set the target destination

Target where the captured data is
forwarded.

Note: This menu item

appears only when
Merge Mode is set to
Data Capture.

Print Port and Network Port On* Enable Forms Merge to

Filter Settings process all data that are sent
Off to the network port.

469
Printer menus

Menu item Submenu item Settings Description

Network Filter Disabled* Specify the network filter for

all data that are sent to the
NULL printer.
OFIS

OFIS+NULL

OFIS+AS400

AS400

PCL

ZPL

ZPLF

USB Port On* Enable Forms Merge to

process all data that are sent
Off to the USB port.

USB Filter Disabled* Specify the USB filter for all

data that are sent to the
NULL printer.
OFIS

OFIS+NULL

OFIS+AS400

AS400

PCL

ZPL

ZPLF

Local Port 1 to 100 (10*) Specify the timeout value for

Timeout Forms Merge jobs that are
sent to the local port.

Miscellaneous Print All Forms Start Print all form sets that are
stored in the intelligent
storage drive or hard disk.

Error Page On* Enable printing of an error

Print page when an error is
Off encountered in a Forms
Merge job.

470
Printer menus

Printing the Menu Settings Page

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Reports.
2. Select Menu Settings Page.

471
Printer finisher options

Printer finisher options

Using the staple finisher
Stapling using the print driver

For Windows users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3. Click Paper/Finishing, and then configure the Paper settings.
4. In the Staple menu, select a setting.
5. Click OK, and then click Print.

For Macintosh users

1. With a document open, choose File > Print.

2. Select a printer.
3. From the Finishing Options menu, select Apply Finishings > Printer Options.
4. Click Staple, and then select a setting.
5. Click Print.

Stapling using the control panel

1. From the control panel, select Print, and then select the source of the print job.
2. Select the document.
3. Select More Settings, and then select Finishing Options.
4. Select Staple, and then select a setting.
5. Print the document.

Using the staple, hole‑punch finisher

Stapling or punching paper using the print driver

For Windows users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3. Click Paper/Finishing, and then configure the Paper settings.
4. Depending on the finishing that you want, select a setting for Staple or Hole punch.

Note: You can select a setting for both if you want to staple and punch the printed
materials.

472
Printer finisher options

5. Click OK, and then click Print.

For Macintosh users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer.
3. From the Finishing Options menu, select Apply Finishings > Printer Options.
4. Click Staple or Punch, and then select a setting.
5. Click Print.

Stapling or punching paper using the control panel

1. From the control panel, select Print, and then select the source of the print job.
2. Select the document.
3. Select More Settings, and then select Finishing Options.
4. Depending on the finishing that you want, select a setting for Staple or Hole punch.

Note: You can select a setting for both if you want to staple and punch the printed
materials.

5. Print the document.

Using the offset stacker

Offset stacking using the print driver

For Windows users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3. Click Paper/Finishing, and then configure the Paper settings.
4. In the Offset menu, select a setting.
5. Click OK, and then click Print.

For Macintosh users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer.
3. From the Finishing Options menu, select Apply Finishings > Printer Options.
4. Click Offset, and then select a setting.
5. Click Print.

Offset stacking using the control panel

1. Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

473
Printer finisher options

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the original document and output
have the same paper size.

2. From the control panel, select Copy, and then specify the number of copies.
3. Select More Settings, and then select Offset Pages.
4. Enable the menu, and then select a setting.
5. Print the document.

Using the booklet finisher

Note: Before creating a booklet, load paper with the short edge toward the right
side of the tray.

Creating a booklet using the print driver

For Windows users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3. Select Booklet.
4. Click the Paper/Finishing tab, and then configure the paper settings.
5. In the Fold menu, select a setting.
6. Click OK, and then click Print.

For Macintosh users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer.
3. From the Finishing Options menu, select Apply Finishings > Printer Options.
4. Select Booklet, and then select a Fold setting.
5. Click OK.

Creating a booklet using the control panel

1. Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the original document and output
have the same paper size.

2. From the control panel, select Copy, and then configure the settings.
3. Select More Settings, and then select Create Booklet.
4. Enable Booklet Finishing, and then select a setting.

474
Printer finisher options

5. Copy the document.

Using the paper transport with folding option

Folding paper using the print driver

For Windows users

1. With a document open, click File > Print.

2. Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3. Click Paper/Finishing, and then configure the paper settings.
4. In the Fold menu, select a setting.
5. Click OK, and then click Print.

For Macintosh users

1. With a document open, choose File > Print.

2. Select a printer.
3. From the Finishing Options menu, select Apply Finishings > Printer Options.
4. Click Fold, and then select a setting.
5. Click Print.

Folding paper using the control panel

1. Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the original document and output
have the same paper size.

2. From the control panel, select Copy, and then specify the number of copies.
3. Select More Settings, and then select Finishing Options.
4. Select Fold, and then select a setting.
5. Copy the document.

475
Maintain the printer

Maintain the printer

Checking the status of parts and supplies

1. From the upper‑right corner of the control panel, select .

2. View the status of the printer parts and supplies.

Note: You can also select to check notifications that require user intervention.

Configuring supply notifications

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Settings > Device > Notifications.

3. Click Custom Supply Notifications.
4. Select a notification for each supply item.
5. Apply the changes.

Setting up email alerts

1. Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes
◦ View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
◦ If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web
page correctly.

2. Click Settings > Device > Notifications.

3. Click Email Alert Setup, and then configure the settings.

476
Maintain the printer

Note: For more information on SMTP settings, contact your email provider.

4. Apply the changes.

5. Click Setup Email Lists and Alerts, and then configure the settings.
6. Apply the changes.

Generating reports and logs

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Reports.
2. Select the report or log that you want to print.

◦ Menu Settings Page—Show the current printer preferences, settings, and

configurations.
◦ Device

Device Information—Show the printer serial number, installed solutions, and fax.
Device Statistics—Show supply status, total printed sheets, and printer job
information.
Profiles List—Show a list of profiles or shortcuts that are stored in the printer.
Asset Report—Show the report containing printer asset information, such as serial
number and model name.
◦ Print

Print Fonts—Show the fonts that are available in each printer language.
Print Demo—Show the demo files that are available in the firmware, the flash option,
and the disk option.
Print Directory—Show the resources that are stored on the flash drive, hard disk, or
intelligent storage drive (ISD).

Note: The report appears only when a flash drive, a printer hard disk, or an
ISD is installed.

◦ Network

Network Setup Page—Show the configured network and wireless settings on the
printer.

Note: This report appears only in network printers and printers connected to
print servers.

Wi-Fi Direct Connected Clients—Show the list of devices that are connected to the
printer using Wi-Fi Direct.

Note: This report appears only when Enable Wi-Fi Direct is set to On.

477
Maintain the printer

Ordering parts and supplies

Contact information and precaution
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about
Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size
plain paper.

Warning—Potential Damage
Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies,
may cause damage to your printer.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark parts and
supplies. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life
of the printer and its imaging components. It can also affect warranty coverage. Damage
caused by the use of third-party parts and supplies is not covered by the warranty. All life
indicators are designed to function with Lexmark parts and supplies, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party parts and supplies are used. Imaging component usage
beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Warning—Potential Damage
Supplies and parts without Return Program agreement terms may be reset and
remanufactured. However, the manufacturer’s warranty does not cover any
damage caused by non-genuine supplies or parts. Resetting counters on the
supply or part without proper remanufacturing can cause damage to your
printer. After resetting the supply or part counter, your printer may display an error
indicating the presence of the reset item.

Ordering a toner cartridge

Notes

• The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard.

• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect
actual yield.

478
Maintain the printer

Return Program toner cartridges for Lexmark CS963

Item United European Rest of Latin Rest of

States, Union, Asia America, Europe,
Canada, European Pacific Puerto Middle
Australia, Economic Rico, and East,
and New Area, Mexico Africa,
Zealand Iceland, Central
Liechtenstein, Eastern
Norway, Europe,
Switzerland Commonwealth
of
Independent
States

Cyan 77L10C0 77L20C0 77L30C0 77L40C0 77L50C0

Magenta 77L10M0 77L20M0 77L30M0 77L40M0 77L50M0

Yellow 77L10Y0 77L20Y0 77L30Y0 77L40Y0 77L50Y0

Black 77L10K0 77L20K0 77L30K0 77L40K0 77L50K0

For more information on countries in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.

High Yield Return Program toner cartridges for Lexmark CS963

Item United European Rest of Latin Rest of

States, Union, Asia America, Europe,
Canada, European Pacific Puerto Middle
Australia, Economic Rico, and East,
and New Area, Mexico Africa,
Zealand Iceland, Central
Liechtenstein, Eastern
Norway, Europe,
Switzerland Commonwealth
of
Independent
States

Cyan 77L1HC0 77L2HC0 77L3HC0 77L4HC0 77L5HC0

Magenta 77L1HM0 77L2HM0 77L3HM0 77L4HM0 77L5HM0

Yellow 77L1HY0 77L2HY0 77L3HY0 77L4HY0 77L5HY0

Black 77L1HK0 77L2HK0 77L3HK0 77L4HK0 77L5HK0

For more information on countries in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.

High Yield Regular toner cartridges for Lexmark CS963

Item Worldwide

Cyan 77L0H20

479
Maintain the printer

Item Worldwide

Magenta 77L0H30

Yellow 77L0H40

Black 77L0H10
For more information on countries in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.

Ordering a black imaging unit

Item Part number

Return Program black imaging unit 77L0ZK0

Black imaging unit 77L0Z10

Ordering a color imaging kit

Item Part number

Return Program color imaging kit 77L0ZV0

Regular color imaging kit 77L0Z50

Ordering the waste toner bottle

Item Part number

Waste toner bottle 77L0W00

Ordering a staple cartridge

Item Part number

Staple cartridge (4‑pack)1 20L7500

Staple cartridge (3‑pack)2 25A0013

1 Available only for the booklet maker.
2 Available only for the booklet finisher, staple finisher, and staple, hole punch finisher.

Ordering a maintenance kit

Match the maintenance kit to the printer voltage.

480
Maintain the printer

Notes

• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the
maintenance kit.
• The maintenance kit includes a fuser and pick tires. These parts may be individually
ordered and replaced if necessary.

Item Part number

100 V Return Program fuser maintenance 41X5654

kit, Type 02

110-120 V Return Program fuser 41X5655

maintenance kit, Type 00

220-240 V Return Program fuser 41X5656

maintenance kit, Type 01

100 V Regular fuser maintenance kit, Type 41X6053

12

110-120 V Regular fuser maintenance kit, 41X6051

Type 10

220-240 V Regular fuser maintenance kit, 41X6052

Type 11

Note: Only an authorized service technician can replace the maintenance kit.
Contact your service provider.

Replacing parts and supplies

Replacing a toner cartridge
1. Open the front door.

481
Maintain the printer

2. Remove the used toner cartridge.

482
Maintain the printer

3. Unpack the new toner cartridge.

4. Insert the new toner cartridge until it clicks into place.

483
Maintain the printer

5. Close the door.

Replacing the black imaging unit

1. Open the front door.

484
Maintain the printer

2. Remove the toner cartridges.

485
Maintain the printer

3. Remove the waste toner bottle.

486
Maintain the printer

Note: To avoid spilling the toner, place the bottle in an upright position.

4. Remove the imaging kit.

487
Maintain the printer

488
Maintain the printer

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause
print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the quality of future print
jobs.

Note: Place the imaging kit on a clean, flat surface and in an upright position to
avoid scratching or damaging the photoconductor drum.

489
Maintain the printer

5. Unlock the used black imaging unit.

490
Maintain the printer

6. Remove the used black imaging unit.

491
Maintain the printer

7. Unpack the new black imaging unit.

8. Insert the new black imaging unit.

9. Lock the new black imaging unit in place.

492
Maintain the printer

10. Insert the imaging kit until it is fully seated.

493
Maintain the printer

11. Insert the waste toner bottle until it clicks into place.

12. Gently pull out the printhead wipers, and then clean the printhead lenses.

494
Maintain the printer

For more information on cleaning the printhead lenses, see Cleaning the printhead lenses on
page 551.

13. Insert the toner cartridges.

14. Close the door.

Replacing the color imaging kit

1. Open the front door.

495
Maintain the printer

2. Remove the toner cartridges.

496
Maintain the printer

3. Remove the waste toner bottle.

497
Maintain the printer

Note: To avoid spilling the toner, place the bottle in an upright position.

4. Remove the used imaging kit.

498
Maintain the printer

Note: Place the imaging kit on a clean, flat surface and in an upright position to
avoid scratching or damaging the photoconductor drum.

499
Maintain the printer

5. Unlock the black imaging unit.

500
Maintain the printer

6. Remove the black imaging unit.

501
Maintain the printer

Note: Do not throw away the black imaging unit. It will be installed on the new
imaging kit.

7. Unpack the new imaging kit.

Note: The imaging kit includes the imaging basket and the cyan, magenta, and
yellow developer units.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause
print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the quality of future print
jobs.

502
Maintain the printer

8. Insert the black imaging unit into the new imaging kit.

9. Lock the black imaging unit in place.

503
Maintain the printer

10. Insert the new imaging kit until it is fully seated.

504
Maintain the printer

11. Insert the waste toner bottle until it clicks into place.

12. Gently pull out the printhead wipers, and then clean the printhead lenses.

505
Maintain the printer

For more information on cleaning the printhead lenses, see Cleaning the printhead lenses on
page 551.

13. Insert the toner cartridges.

14. Close the door.

Replacing the waste toner bottle

1. Open the front door.

506
Maintain the printer

2. Remove the used waste toner bottle.

Note: To avoid spilling the toner, place the bottle in an upright position.

507
Maintain the printer

3. Unpack the new waste toner bottle.

4. Insert the new waste toner bottle until it clicks into place, and then close the door.

508
Maintain the printer

Replacing the fuser

1. Turn off the printer.

509
Maintain the printer

2. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3. Open door B.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

510
Maintain the printer

4. Unlock, and then remove the used fuser.

5. Unpack the new fuser.

6. Insert the new fuser until it clicks into place, and then lock it.

511
Maintain the printer

7. Close the door.

8. Connect one end of the power cord to the printer, and then the other end to the electrical
outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

9. Turn on the printer.

512
Maintain the printer

Replacing the tray insert

1. Pull out the used tray insert.

2. Unpack the new tray insert.

3. Insert the new tray insert.

513
Maintain the printer

Replacing the size guides in the optional 550‑sheet tray

1. Pull out the tray.

514
Maintain the printer

2. Remove the used size guides.

515
Maintain the printer

3. Unpack the new size guides.

4. Insert the new size guides until they click into place.

516
Maintain the printer

5. Insert the tray.

Replacing the cover in the optional 550‑sheet tray

1. Remove the used tray cover.

517
Maintain the printer

2. Unpack the new tray cover.

3. Insert the new tray cover until it clicks into place.

518
Maintain the printer

Replacing the booklet finisher top bin extension

1. Remove the used top bin extension.

519
Maintain the printer

2. Unpack the new top bin extension.

3. Insert the new top bin extension.

520
Maintain the printer

Replacing the hole punch box

Note: Depending on the finisher installed, the appearance of the hole punch box
may vary.

1. Open the finisher door.

521
Maintain the printer

2. Remove the used hole punch box.

522
Maintain the printer

3. Unpack the new hole punch box.

4. Insert the new hole punch box.

523
Maintain the printer

5. Close the finisher door.

Replacing the standard bin

1. Remove the used standard bin.

524
Maintain the printer

2. Unpack the new standard bin.

3. Attach the new standard bin.

525
Maintain the printer

Replacing the fan cover

1. Remove the used fan cover.

526
Maintain the printer

2. Unpack the new cover.

3. Insert the new cover until it clicks into place.

527
Maintain the printer

Replacing the right cover

1. Remove the used right cover.

528
Maintain the printer

2. Unpack the new cover.

3. Insert the new cover until it clicks into place.

529
Maintain the printer

Replacing the paper transport connector cover

1. Remove the standard bin.

530
Maintain the printer

2. Remove the used paper transport connector cover.

3. Unpack the new connector cover.

4. Attach the new connector cover until it clicks into place.

531
Maintain the printer

5. Attach the standard bin.

532
Maintain the printer

Replacing the staple cartridge unit

Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple finisher

1. Grab handle F, and then slide the staple finisher to the left.

533
Maintain the printer

2. Remove the staple cartridge holder.

3. Remove the empty staple cartridge.

534
Maintain the printer

4. Insert the new staple cartridge until it clicks into place.

535
Maintain the printer

5. Insert the staple cartridge holder until it clicks into place.

6. Slide the staple finisher to the right.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple, hole punch

finisher

1. Open door H.

536
Maintain the printer

2. Pull out the green handle, and then remove the staple cartridge holder.

537
Maintain the printer

3. Remove the empty staple cartridge.

538
Maintain the printer

4. Unpack the new staple cartridge.

5. Insert the new staple cartridge until it clicks into place.

539
Maintain the printer

6. Insert the staple cartridge holder until it clicks into place.

540
Maintain the printer

7. Close door H.

Replacing the staple cartridge in the booklet finisher

1. Open door H.

541
Maintain the printer

2. Pull out the green handle, and then remove the staple cartridge holder.

542
Maintain the printer

3. Remove the empty staple cartridge.

543
Maintain the printer

4. Unpack the new staple cartridge.

5. Insert the new staple cartridge until it clicks into place.

544
Maintain the printer

6. Insert the staple cartridge holder until it clicks into place.

545
Maintain the printer

7. Close door H.

Replacing the staple cartridge holders in the booklet finisher

1. Open the finisher door.

546
Maintain the printer

2. Pull out the booklet maker, and then remove the used staple cartridge holders.

547
Maintain the printer

3. Unpack the new staple cartridge holders.

4. Insert the new staple cartridge holders.

548
Maintain the printer

5. Insert the booklet maker, and then close the finisher door.

Resetting the supply usage counters

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration
Menu > Supply Usage And Counters.
2. Select the counter that you want to reset.

Warning—Potential Damage
Supplies and parts without Return Program agreement terms may be reset and
remanufactured. However, the manufacturer’s warranty does not cover any
damage caused by non-genuine supplies or parts. Resetting counters on the
supply or part without proper remanufacturing can cause damage to your
printer. After resetting the supply or part counter, your printer may display an error
indicating the presence of the reset item.

549
Maintain the printer

Cleaning printer parts

Cleaning the printer

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all
cables from the printer before proceeding.

Notes

• Perform this task after every few months.

• Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.

1. Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2. Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer.
4. Using a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth, wipe the outside of the printer.

Notes
◦ Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish
of the printer.
◦ Make sure that all areas of the printer are dry after cleaning.

5. Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

550
Maintain the printer

Cleaning the touch screen

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD
To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables
from the printer before proceeding.

1. Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2. Using a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth, wipe the touch screen.

Notes
◦ Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the touch
screen.
◦ Make sure that the touch screen is dry after cleaning.

3. Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

Cleaning the printhead lenses

1. Open the front door.

551
Maintain the printer

2. Remove the toner cartridges.

3. Gently pull out the wiper until it stops.

552
Maintain the printer

Note: The wiper does not detach from the printer.

4. Push the wiper back into the printhead until it stops.

5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 three times for each printhead.

6. Insert the toner cartridges.

553
Maintain the printer

7. Close the front door.

Emptying the hole punch box

Note: Depending on the finisher installed, the appearance of the hole punch box
may vary.

1. Open the finisher door.

554
Maintain the printer

2. Remove, and then empty the hole punch box.

555
Maintain the printer

3. Insert the hole punch box.

556
Maintain the printer

4. Close the finisher door.

Saving energy and paper

Configuring the power save mode settings
Sleep mode

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Power Management > Timeouts >
Sleep Mode.
2. Set the amount of time that the printer stays idle before it enters Sleep Mode.

Hibernate mode

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Power Management > Timeouts >
Hibernate Timeout.
2. Set the amount of time that the printer stays idle before it enters hibernate mode.

557
Maintain the printer

Notes

• For Hibernate Timeout to work, set Hibernate Timeout on Connection to

Hibernate.
• The Embedded Web Server is disabled when the printer is in hibernate mode.

Adjusting the brightness of the display

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Preferences.
2. In the Screen Brightness menu, adjust the setting.

Conserving supplies
• Print on both sides of the paper.

Note: Two-sided printing is the default setting in the printer.

• Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.

• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before printing it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Moving the printer to another location

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require two or
more people to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:

• Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.

• Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.

558
Maintain the printer

• If the printer has separate floor-standing optional trays or output options attached to it, then
disconnect them before moving the printer.
• If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when
passing over thresholds and breaks in flooring.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays or output
options, then remove the output options and lift the printer off the trays. Do not try to lift the
printer and any options at the same time.
• Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the
printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the
dimensions of the options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
• Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.

Note: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the
printer warranty.

559
Troubleshoot a problem

Troubleshoot a problem
Print quality problems
Find the image that resembles the print quality problem you are having, and then click the
link below it to read problem-solving steps.

Blank or white pages on Dark print on page 582 Ghost images on page 583
page 581

Gray or colored background Incorrect margins on page Light print on page 586
on page 584 585

560
Troubleshoot a problem

Missing colors on page 587 Mottled print and dots on Paper curl on page 681
page 588

Print crooked or skewed on Solid color or black images Text or images cut off on
page 590 on page 591 page 592

561
Troubleshoot a problem

Toner easily rubs off on Uneven print density on Horizontal dark lines on
page 593 page 594 page 595

Horizontal white lines on Vertical white lines on page

page 597 598

562
Troubleshoot a problem

Repeating defects on page

600

Printer error codes

Error codes Error message Solution

2.01 Supply needed. Select Cancel Job and

order the needed supply.
For more information, see
"Ordering parts and
supplies" section.

3.01 The standard output bin is Remove the paper from the
full. bin, and then select
Continue.

3.02, 3.03, 3.04 Remove paper from bin [x]. Remove the paper from the
bin, and then select
Continue.

7.13, 7.23, 7.33,7.43 Insert tray [x]. Insert the indicated tray.

8.01 Close the front door. Keep the front door closed
unless performing
maintenance.

8.02, 8.03, 8.04, 8.05, 8.08, Close door [x]. Keep the indicated door
8.10, 8.11 closed unless performing
maintenance.

8.06 Reattach the 1500‑sheet Make sure that the tray is

tray. properly attached to the
printer.

563
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

8.07 Reattach staple finisher. Make sure that the finisher

is properly attached to the
printer.

8.08 Close paper transport cover Keep the cover closed

F. unless performing
maintenance.
8.09 Close paper transport cover
G.

9 Printer had to restart. Last Select Continue to clear

job may be incomplete. the message and continue
printing.

11.11, 11.21, 11.31, 11.41, Load <source/> with <type/ Load the indicated tray with
11.51, 11.81, 11.91 > <size/>. paper. For more
information, see "Loading
11.12, 11.22, 11.32, 11.42, Load <source/> with <type/ paper and specialty media"
11.82, 11.92 > <size/> <orientation/>. section.

12.11, 12.21, 12.31, 12.41, Change <source/> to <type/ Pull out the indicated tray,
12.51, 12.91 > <size/>. remove paper, and then
load the correct paper type
12.12, 12.22, 12.32, Change <source/> to <type/ and size. For more
12.4212.92 > <size/> <orientation/>. information, see "Loading
paper and specialty media"
section.

31.00 Hole punch box missing or

full. 1. Open door H.
2. Remove the hole
punch box.

Note: If the
hole punch
box is full,
then empty it.

3. Insert the hole punch

box.
4. Close door H.

564
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

31.35, 31.35A, 31.35B Reinstall the missing or

unresponsive waste toner 1. Open the front door.
bottle. 2. Remove the waste
toner bottle.

Note: To
avoid spilling
the toner,
place the
bottle in an
upright
position.

3. Insert the waste toner

bottle.
4. Close the front door.

31.40z, 31.41z, 31.42z, Reinstall missing or

31.43z unresponsive [color] toner 1. Open the front door.
cartridge. 2. Remove the
cartridge.
3. Insert the cartridge.
4. Close the front door.

565
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

31.60z Reinstall missing or

unresponsive black imaging 1. Open the front door.
unit. 2. Remove the toner
cartridges.
3. Remove the waste
toner bottle.

Note: To
avoid spilling
the toner,
place the
bottle in an
upright
position.

4. Remove the imaging

kit.

Warning—
Potential
Damage
Do not
expose the
imaging kit to
direct light.
Extended
exposure to
light may
cause print
quality
problems.

Warning—
Potential
Damage
Do not touch
the
photoconductor
drum. Doing
so may affect
the quality of
future print
jobs.

5. Unlock, and then

remove the black
imaging unit.

566
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

6. Insert the black
imaging unit, and
then lock it in place.
7. Insert the imaging kit
until it is fully seated.
8. Insert the waste toner
bottle.
9. Insert the toner
cartridges.
10. Close the front door.

567
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

31.64z Reinstall missing,

unplugged, or unresponsive 1. Open the front door.
color imaging kit. 2. Remove the toner
cartridges.
3. Remove the waste
toner bottle.

Note: To
avoid spilling
the toner,
place the
bottle in an
upright
position.

4. Remove the imaging

kit.

Warning—
Potential
Damage
Do not
expose the
imaging kit to
direct light.
Extended
exposure to
light may
cause print
quality
problems.

Warning—
Potential
Damage
Do not touch
the
photoconductor
drum. Doing
so may affect
the quality of
future print
jobs.

5. Insert the imaging kit

until it is fully seated.

568
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

6. Insert the waste toner
bottle.
7. Insert the toner
cartridges.
8. Close the front door.

31.80z Reinstall missing or

unresponsive fuser. 1. Open door B.

CAUTION
—
HOT
SURFACE
The
inside
of
the
printer
might
be
hot.
To
reduce
the
risk
of
injury
from
a hot
component,
allow
the
surface
to
cool
before
touching
it.

2. Unlock, and then

remove the fuser.
3. Insert the fuser, and
then lock it in place.
4. Close door B.

32.40z, 32.41z, 32.42z, Replace unsupported [color] For more information, see
32.43z toner cartridge. Replacing a toner cartridge
on page 481.

569
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

32.60z Replace unsupported black For more information, see

imaging unit. Replacing the black imaging
unit on page 484.

32.65z Replace unsupported color For more information, see

imaging kit. Replacing the color imaging
kit on page 495.

33.40z, 33.41z, 33.42z, Refilled regular [color] For more information, see
33.43z cartridge Refilled regular [color]
cartridge on page 680.

33.60z Non-genuine black imaging For more information, see

unit, see User's Guide. Non‑Lexmark supply on
page 680.
33.64z Non-genuine color imaging
kit, see User's Guide.

34.00 Paper too short. Set the paper size setting to

match the paper loaded in
the tray. From the control
panel, navigate to Settings
> Paper > Tray >
Configuration > Paper
Size/Type.

34.10, 34.20, 34.30, 34.40, Check [source], adjust Pull out the indicated tray,
34.50 guides and orientation. and then make sure that the
paper is loaded correctly.
For more information,
see :Loading paper and
specialty media" section.

34.90 Check multipurpose feeder, Make sure that the paper is

adjust guides and loaded correctly. For more
orientation. information, see "Loading
the multipurpose feeder"
section.

37.1 Insufficient memory to Try either of the following:

collate job.
• Select Continue to
print the part of the
job that is stored and
to begin collating the
rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current
print job.

37.3 Insufficient memory, some Select Continue to clear

held jobs were deleted. the message and continue
printing.

570
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

38.1 Memory full. Try one or more of the

following:

• Select Continue to
clear the message
and continue printing.
• Cancel the current
print job.
• Install more printer
memory.
• Reduce the number
of pages in the print
job.

39.1 Complex page, some data Try one or more of the

may not have printed. following:

• Select Continue to
clear the message
and continue printing.
• Cancel the current
print job.
• Install more printer
memory.
• Reduce the
complexity and size
of the print job before
sending it to print
again.
• Reduce the number
of pages in the print
job.
• Reduce the number
and size of any
downloaded fonts.
• Delete any
unnecessary fonts or
macros from the print
job.
• Reduce the number
of graphics in the
print job.

42.yyC, 42.yyK, 42.yyM, Replace [color] toner For more information, see
42.yyY cartridge, printer region Replace cartridge, printer
mismatch. region mismatch on page
679.

571
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

43.40Y, 43.41Y, 43.42Y, Reinstall [color] toner

43.43Y cartridge. 1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the
cartridge.
3. Insert the cartridge.
4. Close the front door.

43.40Z, 43.41Z, 43.42Z, Replace [color] toner For more information, see
43.43Z cartridge. Replacing a toner cartridge
on page 481.

50 PPDS font error. Install the PPDS font

indicated in the print job,
and then select Continue to
let the printer search for the
substitute font.

51 Defective flash detected. Try one or more of the

following:

• Replace the flash

memory.
• Select Continue to
clear the message
and continue printing.
• Cancel the current
print job.

52 Not enough free space in Try one or more of the

flash memory for resources. following:

• Select Continue to
clear the message
and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros,
and other data stored
in the flash memory.
• Install a storage drive.

Note:
Downloaded
fonts and
macros that
are not
previously
stored in the
flash memory
are deleted.

572
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

58.4 Incorrect output option Turn off the printer, and

configuration. then install the correct bin
or finisher.

61 Remove defective disk. Replace the defective

storage drive.

62 Disk full. Try one or more of the

following:

• Select Continue to
clear the message
and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros,
and other data stored
in the storage drive.
• Install a storage drive.

63 Format the disk. Formatting now wipes all

information from the storage
drive.

To format the disk, do the

following:

1. From the control

panel, navigate to
Settings > Device >
Maintenance > Out
of Service Erase.
2. Select Sanitize all
information on hard
disk, and then select
ERASE.

71.4 Printer's time is incorrect. Configure the printer time.

From the control panel,
navigate to Settings >
Device > Preferences >
Date and Time >
Configure.

573
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

75.01 Secure Element detected. Do either of the following:

• Use the installed

Secure Element.

Note: The
printer erases
all existing
certificates
and may also
erase and
reformat the
storage drive.

• Turn off the printer,

and then remove the
Secure Element.

75.02 Secure Element not

recognized.

75.03 Error communicating with Do either of the following:

Secure Element.
• Stop using the
Secure Element.

Note: The
printer erases
all existing
certificates
and may also
erase and
reformat the
storage drive.

• Turn off the printer,

remove, and then
install the Secure
Element.

574
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

75.11 Secure Element update Do either of the following:

failed.
• Try the update again.
• Cancel the update.

Note: The
printer may
erase all
existing
certificates
and storage
drive
contents.

75.12 Secure Element update Do either of the following:

incomplete.
• Restart the printer.

Note: Wait for

10 seconds to
complete the
update.

• Cancel the update.

Note: The
printer may
erase all
existing
certificates
and storage
drive
contents.

80.01, 80.09 Maintenance kit nearly low. Select Continue to clear

the message.
80.11, 80.19 Maintenance kit low.

80.21, 80.29 Maintenance kit very low.

80.31 Replace maintenance kit to For more information, see

continue printing. Replacing the fuser on page
509.
80.31 Replace maintenance kit,
recommended life
exceeded.

575
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

81.11 1500-sheet tray roller kit Select Continue to clear

low. the message.

81.31 Replace 1500-sheet tray For more information,

roller kit, recommended life contact customer support.
exceeded.

82.00, 82.02, 82.09 Waste toner bottle is nearly For more information, see
full. Replacing the waste toner
bottle on page 506.
82.3, 82.32, 82.33, 82.39 Replace the waste toner
bottle.

83.1y Transfer module low. Select Continue to clear

the message.

83.3y Replace transfer module, For more information,

recommended life contact customer support.
exceeded.

83.4y Replace transfer module.

83.20 Staple cartridge low. Select Continue to clear

the message.
83.20 Staple S2 inner low.

83.20 Staple S2 outer low.

83.30 Staple cartridge empty or Try either of the following:

missing.
• Remove, and then
insert the staple
cartridge.
• Replace the staple
cartridge. For more
information, see
Replacing the staple
cartridge in the
staple, hole punch
finisher on page 536
or Replacing the
staple cartridge in the
staple finisher on
page 533.

576
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

83.30 Staple cartridge S1 empty Try either of the following:

or missing.
• Remove, and then
insert the staple
cartridge.
• Replace the staple
cartridge. For more
information, see
Replacing the staple
cartridge in the
booklet finisher on
page 541.

83.30 Inner staple cartridge S2 Try either of the following:

empty or missing.
• Remove, and then
83.30 Outer staple cartridge S2 insert the staple
empty or missing. cartridge.
• Replace the staple
cartridge. For more
information, see
Replacing the staple
cartridge holders in
the booklet finisher on
page 546.

84.01K, 84.03K, 84.09K Black imaging unit nearly Select Continue to clear
low. the message.

84.11K, 84.13K, 84.19K Black imaging unit low.

84.21C, 84.03C, 84.09C Black imaging unit very low.

84.01C, 84.03C, 84.09C Color imaging kit nearly low.

84.11C, 84.13C, 84.19C Color imaging kit low.

84.21C, 84.23C, 84.29C Color imaging kit very low.

84.31, 84.33 Replace black imaging unit, For more information, see
recommended life Replacing the black imaging
exceeded. unit on page 484.

84.31, 84.33 Replace color imaging kit, For more information, see
recommended life Replacing the color imaging
exceeded. kit on page 495.

84.41, 84.43, 84.48 Replace black imaging unit For more information, see
to continue printing. Replacing the black imaging
unit on page 484.

84.41, 84.43, 84.48 Replace color imaging kit to For more information, see
continue printing. Replacing the color imaging
kit on page 495.

577
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

88.00[x], 88.07[x], 88.08[x], [Color] toner cartridge is Select Continue to clear

88.09[x] nearly low. the message.

88.10[x], 88.17[x], 88.18[x], [Color] toner cartridge is

88.19[x] low.

88.20[x], 88.27[x], 88.28[x], [Color] toner cartridge is

88.29[x] very low.

88.30[x], 88.37[x], 88.38[x] Replace [color] toner For more information, see
cartridge, <NUM/> Replacing a toner cartridge
estimated pages remaining. on page 481.

88.30[x], 88.37[x], 88.38[x] Replace [color] toner

cartridge.

88.40[x], 88.47[x], 88.48[x] Replace [color] toner

cartridge, 0 pages remain.

88.40[x], 88.47[x], 88.48[x] Replace [color] toner

cartridge.

200.03, 200.05, 200.12, Paper jam in [LOCATION/]. For more information, see
200.13, 200.14, 200.15, Paper jam in door B on
200.22, 200.23, 200.24, page 619.
200.25, 200.26, 200.32,
200.33, 200.34, 200.35,
200.36, 200.42, 200.43,
200.44, 200.45, 200.46,
200.52, 200.53, 200.54,
200.55, 200.56, 200.91,
201.91, 202.02, 202.03,
202.04, 202.05, 202.12,
202.13, 202.14, 202.15,
202.22, 202.23, 202.24,
202.25, 202.32, 202.33,
202.34, 202.35, 202.42,
202.43, 202.44, 202.45,
202.52, 202.53, 202.54,
202.55, 202.91, 202.93,
202.95, 231.03, 231.05,
231.13, 231.15, 231.23,
231.25, 231.33, 231.35,
231.43, 231.45, 231.53,
231.55, 231.91, 232.03,
232.05, 232.13, 232.15,
232.23, 232.25, 232.33,
232.35, 232.43, 232.45,
232.53, 232.55, 232.93,
232.94, 232.95, 240.05,
240.25, 240.35, 240.45,
240.55, 240.91, 240.95,
241.12, 241.14, 241.15,
241.91

578
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

240.06 Paper jam in [LOCATION/]. For more information, see

Paper jam in the
multipurpose feeder on
page 613.

241.16, 241.82, 241.83, Paper loading error in

241.84, 661.13, 661.84 [LOCATION/]. 1. Open tray 1.
2. Remove, and then
readjust the paper
stack.
3. If necessary, adjust
the paper guides.
4. Reload tray 1.
5. Close tray 1.

242.23, 242.25, 242.35, Paper jam in [LOCATION/]. For more information, see
242.45, 242.55, 242.91 Paper jam in the optional
550‑sheet tray on page 609.

242.33, 242.43, 243.33, Paper jam in [LOCATION/]. For more information, see
243.35, 243.36, 243.43, either of the following:
243.35, 243.45, 243.45,
243.55, 243.91, 244.43, • Paper jam in the 2 x
244.45, 244.91 550-sheet tray on
page 614
• Paper jam in the
2000‑sheet tandem
tray on page 616

243.43, 243.53, 244.43, Paper jam in [LOCATION/]. For more information, see
244.45, 244.46, 244.91, Paper jam in the
245.53, 245.56, 245.55, 1500‑sheet tray on page
245.91, 602.59, 664.43, 617.
665.53

400.11, 400.13, 400.15, Paper jam in [LOCATION/]. For more information, see
401.11, 401.13, 401.15, Paper jam in the staple,
404.19, 438.11, 438.21, hole punch finisher on page
444.66, 450.21, 450.23, 633.
450.25, 450.98, 450.99,
451.21, 451.23, 451.25,
452.66, 453.21, 453.23,
454.21, 454.23, 454.25,
457.21, 457.23, 457.25,
460.66, 461.66, 464.66,
465.66, 466.66, 467.66,
468.66, 469.66, 472.66,
477.66, 480.66, 483.66,
486.29, 504.11, 504.15,
505.11, 505.15, 514.19,
698.29

579
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

400.11, 400.13, 400.15, Paper jam in [LOCATION/]. For more information, see
401.11, 401.13, 401.15, Paper jam in the booklet
404.19, 438.11, 438.21, finisher on page 651.
442.66, 444.66, 445.66,
450.21, 450.23, 450.25,
451.21, 451.23, 451.25,
451.98, 451.99, 452.66,
453.21, 453.23, 453.25,
454.21, 454.23, 454.25,
457.21, 457.23, 457.25,
459.66, 460.66, 461.66,
462.66, 463.66, 464.66,
465.66, 466.66, 467.66,
468.66, 469.66, 470.66,
472.66, 473.66, 476.66,
477.66, 480.66, 483.66,
486.29, 490.66, 491.21,
491.25, 491.66, 493.21,
494.21, 492.66, 494.66,
495.66, 496.66, 497.66,
504.11, 504.15, 505.11,
505.15, 514.19, 698.29

420.11, 420.13, 420.15, Paper jam in [LOCATION/]. For more information, see
420.99, 421.56, 422.56, Paper jam in the staple
423.56, 424.56, 425.13, finisher on page 625.
425.15, 425.11, 426.11,
426.15, 428.56A, 428.56B,
431.56, 435.56, 438.11,
439.19, 461.56, 698.19

438.11, 500.11, 500.13, Paper jam in [LOCATION/]. For more information, see
500.15, 500.99, 502.11, Paper jam in the folding
502.13, 502.15, 504.11, paper transport on page
504.13, 504.15, 505.13, 629.
506.11, 506.13, 506.15,
507.11, 507.13, 507.15,
508.56, 509.56, 510.56,
511.56, 512.56, 513.56,
514.19, 698.19, 698.29

602.29, 662.23 Paper loading error in tray For more information, see
2. Loading the 550-sheet tray
on page 117.

602.39, 663.33 Paper loading error in tray For more information, see
3. either of the following:

• Loading the 550-

sheet tray on page
117
• Loading the 2000-
sheet tandem tray on
page 122

580
Troubleshoot a problem

Error codes Error message Solution

602.49, 664.43 Paper loading error in tray For more information, see
4. Loading the 550-sheet tray
on page 117.

Printing problems
Print quality is poor

Blank or white pages

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that all packing material is removed from the imaging kit, imaging unit, and toner
cartridges.
• Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark toner cartridge.

Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a supported one.

• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

581
Troubleshoot a problem

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Dark print

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Depending on your operating system, reduce the toner darkness from the Printing
Preferences or Print dialog.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness.

582
Troubleshoot a problem

• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

• Make sure that the paper does not have a texture or rough finish.
• Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store the paper in its original
wrapper until you are ready to use it.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Ghost images

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Load the tray with the correct paper type and weight.
• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

583
Troubleshoot a problem

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Gray or colored background

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that the printer settings for texture and weight match the paper being loaded.

From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Paper > Media Configuration > Media
Types.

Note: Rough paper texture and heavy paper weight may print more slowly.

• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

584
Troubleshoot a problem

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Incorrect margins

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Adjust the paper guides in the tray to the correct position for the paper loaded.
• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from the Printing Preferences or
Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

585
Troubleshoot a problem

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Light print

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that all packing material is removed from the imaging kit, imaging unit, and toner
cartridges.
• Depending on your operating system, increase the toner darkness from the Printing
Preferences or Print dialog.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness.

• From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality, and then turn off Color
Saver.
• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

586
Troubleshoot a problem

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

• Make sure that the paper does not have a texture or rough finish.
• Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store the paper in its original
wrapper until you are ready to use it.

• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Missing colors

587
Troubleshoot a problem

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that all packing material is removed from the imaging kit, imaging unit, and toner
cartridges.
• Remove the developer unit of the missing color.

1. Remove the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Remove, and then insert the developer unit of the missing color.
3. Insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Mottled print and dots

588
Troubleshoot a problem

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Check the printer for leaked toner contamination.

• Make sure that the paper size and paper type settings match the paper loaded. From the
control panel, navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

Note: Make sure that the paper does not have a texture or rough finish.

• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size and paper type from the
Printing Preferences or Print dialog. Make sure that the settings match the paper loaded in
the tray.
• Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store the paper in its original
wrapper until you are ready to use it.

• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

589
Troubleshoot a problem

Print crooked or skewed

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Load paper from a fresh package.

1. Open the tray, and then remove the paper.

2. Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store the paper in its
original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

3. Adjust the paper guides in the tray to the correct position for the paper loaded.
• Make sure that you are printing on a supported paper.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

590
Troubleshoot a problem

Solid color or black images

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more than 10
minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black imaging unit.
Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

591
Troubleshoot a problem

Text or images cut off

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that all packing material is removed from the imaging kit, imaging unit, and toner
cartridges.
• Adjust the paper guides in the tray to the correct position for the paper loaded.
• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from the Printing Preferences or
Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

592
Troubleshoot a problem

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Toner easily rubs off

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try any of the following:

• Make sure that the printer power cord is plugged into an appropriately rated and properly
grounded electrical outlet.
• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• Configure the paper type from the control panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray
Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

593
Troubleshoot a problem

Uneven print density

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Open door B, and then make sure that the second transfer roller is locked in place.
• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

594
Troubleshoot a problem

Horizontal dark lines

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• If the issue is seen on a copied document, then clean the scanner.

1. From the home screen, touch Settings > Troubleshooting > Cleaning the Scanner.
2. Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, clean the scanner. For more information, see .
• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

• Make sure that the paper does not have a texture or rough finish.
• Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store the paper in its original
wrapper until you are ready to use it.

• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

595
Troubleshoot a problem

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Vertical dark lines

Notes

• Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control
panel, navigate to Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.
• Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded in the
portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

• Make sure that the paper does not have a texture or rough finish.
• Load paper from a fresh package.

596
Troubleshoot a problem

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store the paper in its original
wrapper until you are ready to use it.

• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Horizontal white lines

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

597
Troubleshoot a problem

Try one or more of the following:

• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

• Load the specified paper source with the recommended paper type.
• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the photoconductor drum to direct light. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drums. Doing so may affect the quality of
future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.
• Clean the printhead lenses using the printhead cleaning tool. For more information, see
Cleaning the printhead lenses on page 551.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Vertical white lines

598
Troubleshoot a problem

Notes
Before solving the problem, do the following:

1. Perform Color Adjust. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings › Print › Quality › Advanced Imaging › Color Adjust.
2. Print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.

Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded
in the portrait orientation.

Try one or more of the following:

• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

• Check if you are using the recommended paper type. Be sure to load the specified paper
source with the recommended paper type.
• Make sure that the imaging kit and black imaging unit are properly installed.

1. Remove the imaging kit, and then remove the black imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not expose the imaging kit and black imaging unit to direct light for more
than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage
Do not touch the photoconductor drum under the imaging kit and black
imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

2. Insert the black imaging unit, and then insert the imaging kit.
• Clean the printhead lenses using the printhead cleaning tool. For more information, see
Cleaning the printhead lenses on page 551.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

599
Troubleshoot a problem

Repeating defects

Notes

• Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control
panel, navigate to Settings › Troubleshooting › Print Quality Test Pages.
• Use tray 1 to print the sample pages and make sure that the paper is loaded in the
portrait orientation.

1. Measure the distance between the repeating defects on the affected color page. Using the
Maintenance Defect Ruler, measure the distance between the repeating defects on the
affected color page.
2. Replace the supply item or part that matches the measurement on the affected color page.

Color imaging kit or black imaging unit

◦ 94.5 mm (3.72 in.)

◦ 19.9 mm (1.18 in.)
◦ 23.2 mm (0.19 in.)
Developer unit

◦ 43.6 mm (1.72 in.)

◦ 45.0 mm (1.77 in.)
Fuser

◦ 95 mm (3.74 in.)
◦ 110 mm (4.33 in.)

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Print jobs do not print

Try one or more of the following:

• From the document that you are trying to print, open the Printing Preferences or Print dialog,
and then check if the correct printer is selected.
• Check if the printer is on, and then resolve any error messages that appear on the display.
• Check if the ports are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and
the printer. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer.

600
Troubleshoot a problem

• Remove, and then reinstall the print driver.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Confidential and other held documents do not print

Try one or more of the following:

• From the control panel, check if the documents appear in the Held Jobs list.

Note: If the documents are not listed, then print the documents using the Print and
Hold options.

• Resolve possible formatting errors or invalid data in the print job.

◦ Delete the print job, and then send it again.

◦ For PDF files, generate a new file, and then print the document.
• If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading the multiple job titles as
duplicates.

◦ For Windows users, make sure to select Keep duplicate documents in the Printing
Preferences or Print dialog.
◦ For Macintosh users, name each job differently.
• Delete some held jobs to free up printer memory.
• Install more printer memory.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that you are printing on the correct paper.

• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size and paper type from the
Printing Preferences or Print dialog. Make sure that the settings match the paper loaded.

Note: You can also change the settings on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

• Check if the trays are linked. For more information, see Linking trays on page 135.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Slow printing
Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that the printer cable is securely connected to the printer, computer, print server,
option, and other network device.

601
Troubleshoot a problem

• Make sure that the printer is not in Quiet Mode.

From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Maintenance > Config Menu >
Device Operations > Quiet Mode.
• Specify the resolution of the document that you want to print.

1. Depending on your operating system, access the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
2. Set the resolution to 4800 CQ.

Note: You can also change the setting on the control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Print > Quality > Print Resolution.

• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog.

Notes
◦ You can also change the setting on the control panel. Navigate to Settings >
Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.
◦ Heavier paper print more slowly.
◦ Paper that is narrower than letter, A4, and legal may print more slowly.

• Make sure that the printer settings for texture and weight match the paper being loaded.

From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Paper > Media Configuration > Media
Types.

Note: Rough paper texture and heavy paper weight may print more slowly.

• Remove held jobs.

• Make sure that the printer is not overheating.

Notes
◦ Allow the printer to cool down after a long print job.
◦ Observe the recommended ambient temperature for the printer. For more
information, see Selecting a location for the printer on page 104.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

The printer is not responding

Try one or more of the following:

• Check if the power cord is connected to the electrical outlet.

602
Troubleshoot a problem

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.

• Make sure that the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.
• Check if the printer is on.
• Make sure that the printer is not in Sleep or Hibernate Mode.
• Make sure that the cables connecting the printer and computer are connected to the correct
ports.
• Turn off the printer, install the hardware options, and then turn on the printer. For more
information, see the documentation that came with the option.
• Install the correct print driver.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Unable to read flash drive

Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that the printer is not busy processing multiple jobs.
• Make sure that the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.

Note: The flash drive does not work when it is inserted into the rear USB port.

• Make sure that the flash drive is supported. For more information, see Supported flash drives
and file types on page 102.
• Remove, and then insert the flash drive.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Enabling the USB port

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports > USB.
2. Select Enable USB Port.

Clearing jams
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly

• Make sure that the paper lies flat in the tray.

603
Troubleshoot a problem

Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

• Do not load or remove a tray while the printer is printing.

• Do not load too much paper. Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
• Do not slide paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

• Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly and are not pressing tightly against
the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.

• Do not load paper that is wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled.
• Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

604
Troubleshoot a problem

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure that the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control
panel.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Identifying jam locations

Notes

• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial
prints after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank
pages.
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.

605
Troubleshoot a problem

Jam locations

1 Standard bin

606
Troubleshoot a problem

Jam locations

2 Door B

3 Multipurpose feeder

4 Standard tray

5 Staple finisher

6 Staple, hole punch finisher

7 Optional 550‑sheet tray

8 1500‑sheet tray

9 2 x 550‑sheet tray

10 Booklet finisher

11 Paper transport with folding option

12 2000‑sheet tandem tray

Paper jam in the standard tray

1. Pull out the standard tray.

607
Troubleshoot a problem

2. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

608
Troubleshoot a problem

3. Insert the tray.

Paper jam in the optional 550‑sheet tray

1. Open door D.

609
Troubleshoot a problem

2. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

610
Troubleshoot a problem

3. Close the door.

4. Pull out the optional 550‑sheet tray.

611
Troubleshoot a problem

5. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

612
Troubleshoot a problem

6. Insert the tray.

Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder

1. Remove any paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

613
Troubleshoot a problem

Paper jam in the 2 x 550-sheet tray

1. Open door E.

2. Remove the jammed paper inside door E.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3. Close door E.
4. Pull out tray 3.

614
Troubleshoot a problem

5. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

615
Troubleshoot a problem

6. Insert tray 3.
7. Repeat step 4 through step 6 for tray 4.

Paper jam in the 2000‑sheet tandem tray

1. Open door E.

2. Remove the jammed paper inside door E.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

616
Troubleshoot a problem

3. Close door E.

Paper jam in the 1500‑sheet tray

1. Open door K.

2. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

617
Troubleshoot a problem

3. Close door K.
4. Grab handle J, and then slide the tray to the right.

5. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

618
Troubleshoot a problem

6. Slide the tray back into place.

Paper jam in door B

1. Open door B.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
L'intérieur de l'imprimante risque d'être brûlant. pour réduire le risque de
brûlure, laissez la surface ou le composant refroidir avant d'y toucher.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
El interior de la impresora podría estar caliente. Para evitar el riesgo de
heridas producidas por el contacto con un componente caliente, deje que la
superficie se enfríe antes de tocarlo.

619
Troubleshoot a problem

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
Das Innere des Druckers kann sehr heiß sein. Vermeiden Sie Verletzungen,
indem Sie heiße Komponenten stets abkühlen lassen, bevor Sie ihre
Oberfläche berühren.

Warning—Potential Damage
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal frame of
the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

620
Troubleshoot a problem

2. Remove the jammed paper in any of the following locations:

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

◦ Above the fuser

◦ In the fuser

621
Troubleshoot a problem

◦ Below the fuser

622
Troubleshoot a problem

◦ Under the standard bin exit roller

◦ In the duplex unit

623
Troubleshoot a problem

3. Close door B.

624
Troubleshoot a problem

Paper jam in the standard bin

1. Remove any paper from the standard bin.
2. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Paper jam in the staple finisher

1. Remove the jammed paper in the staple finisher bin.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

625
Troubleshoot a problem

2. Grab handle F, and then slide the staple finisher to the left.

3. Open door R1, and then rotate the knob R2 clockwise.

626
Troubleshoot a problem

4. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

627
Troubleshoot a problem

5. Close door R1.

6. Remove the jammed paper in the standard bin exit roller.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

7. Slide the staple finisher back into place.

628
Troubleshoot a problem

Paper jam in the folding paper transport

1. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

2. Open door F.

629
Troubleshoot a problem

3. Lift handle N4.

4. Lift handle N5.

630
Troubleshoot a problem

5. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

6. Close handle N5, and then close handle N4.

7. Push down handle N1.

631
Troubleshoot a problem

8. Turn knob N2 counterclockwise.

9. Remove the jammed paper.

Warning—Potential Damage
To prevent damage to the printer, remove any hand accessories before removing the
jammed paper.

632
Troubleshoot a problem

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

10. Put handle N1 back into place.

11. Close door F.

Paper jam in the staple, hole punch finisher

If your printer is configured with a paper transport, then do the following:

1. Remove the jammed paper in bin 1.

Notes
◦ Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
◦ Do not remove the printed pages that are in the staple compiler to avoid
missing pages.

633
Troubleshoot a problem

2. Remove the jammed paper in the finisher standard bin.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3. Remove the jammed paper in bin 2.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

634
Troubleshoot a problem

4. Open paper transport cover G, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

635
Troubleshoot a problem

5. Close paper transport cover G.

6. Open door I, open door R1, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

636
Troubleshoot a problem

7. Close door R1, and then close door I.

8. Open paper transport cover F.

637
Troubleshoot a problem

9. Open door H.

10. Lift handle R4.

638
Troubleshoot a problem

11. Turn knob R3 counterclockwise, and then remove the jammed paper in bin 1.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

639
Troubleshoot a problem

12. Turn knob R2 counterclockwise, and then remove the jammed paper in paper transport
cover F.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

640
Troubleshoot a problem

13. Close paper transport cover F.

14. Return handle R4 to its original position.
15. Close door H.

If your printer is configured with a folding paper transport, then do the following:

1. Remove the jammed paper in bin 1.

Notes
◦ Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
◦ Do not remove the printed pages that are in the staple compiler to avoid
missing pages.

641
Troubleshoot a problem

2. Remove the jammed paper in the finisher standard bin.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3. Remove the jammed paper in bin 2.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

642
Troubleshoot a problem

4. Open door F.

5. Open door N4.

643
Troubleshoot a problem

6. Open door N5.

7. Open door H.

644
Troubleshoot a problem

8. Lift handle R4.

9. Turn knob R3 counterclockwise, and then remove the jammed paper in bin 1.

645
Troubleshoot a problem

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

10. Turn knob R2 counterclockwise, and then remove the jammed paper between doors N4 and
N5.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

646
Troubleshoot a problem

11. Open door B.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
L'intérieur de l'imprimante risque d'être brûlant. pour réduire le risque de
brûlure, laissez la surface ou le composant refroidir avant d'y toucher.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
El interior de la impresora podría estar caliente. Para evitar el riesgo de
heridas producidas por el contacto con un componente caliente, deje que la
superficie se enfríe antes de tocarlo.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
Das Innere des Druckers kann sehr heiß sein. Vermeiden Sie Verletzungen,
indem Sie heiße Komponenten stets abkühlen lassen, bevor Sie ihre
Oberfläche berühren.

647
Troubleshoot a problem

Warning—Potential Damage
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal frame of
the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

12. Remove the jammed paper under the standard bin exit roller.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

648
Troubleshoot a problem

13. Close door B.

14. Push down handle N1.

15. Turn knob N2 counterclockwise.

649
Troubleshoot a problem

16. Remove the jammed paper.

Warning—Potential Damage
To prevent damage to the printer, remove any hand accessories before removing the
jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

17. Put handle N1 back into place.

18. Close handle N5, and then close handle N4.
19. Close door F.

650
Troubleshoot a problem

20. Return handle R4 to its original position.

21. Close door H.

Paper jam in the booklet finisher

If your printer is configured with a paper transport, then do the following:

1. Remove the jammed paper in the finisher standard bin.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

2. Remove the jammed paper in bin 1.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

651
Troubleshoot a problem

3. Remove the jammed paper in bin 1.

Notes
◦ Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
◦ Do not remove the printed pages that are in the staple compiler to avoid
missing pages.

4. Remove the jammed paper in bin 3.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

652
Troubleshoot a problem

5. Open paper transport cover G, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

653
Troubleshoot a problem

6. Close paper transport cover G.

7. Open paper transport cover F.

654
Troubleshoot a problem

8. Open door H.

9. Move handle R3 to the right, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

655
Troubleshoot a problem

10. Move handle R1 to the left, turn knob R2 counterclockwise, and then remove the jammed
paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

656
Troubleshoot a problem

11. Turn knob R5 counterclockwise, and then remove the jammed paper from the finisher
standard bin.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

657
Troubleshoot a problem

12. Lift handle R4, turn knob R2 clockwise, and then remove the jammed paper.

658
Troubleshoot a problem

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

13. Close paper transport cover F.

14. Return handles R1, R3, and R4 to their original position.

659
Troubleshoot a problem

15. Close door H.

If your printer is configured with a folding paper transport, then do the following:

1. Remove the jammed paper in the finisher standard bin.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

2. Remove the jammed paper in bin 1.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

660
Troubleshoot a problem

3. Remove the jammed paper in bin 1.

Notes
◦ Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
◦ Do not remove the printed pages that are in the staple compiler to avoid
missing pages.

4. Remove the jammed paper in bin 3.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

661
Troubleshoot a problem

5. Open door F.

6. Open door H.

662
Troubleshoot a problem

7. Open door N4.

8. Open door N5.

663
Troubleshoot a problem

9. Lift handle R4.

10. Turn knob R2 clockwise, and then remove the jammed paper in handle R4.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

664
Troubleshoot a problem

11. Move handle R1 to the left, turn knob R2 counterclockwise, and then remove the jammed
paper between doors N4 and N5.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

665
Troubleshoot a problem

12. Open door B.

666
Troubleshoot a problem

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
L'intérieur de l'imprimante risque d'être brûlant. pour réduire le risque de
brûlure, laissez la surface ou le composant refroidir avant d'y toucher.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
El interior de la impresora podría estar caliente. Para evitar el riesgo de
heridas producidas por el contacto con un componente caliente, deje que la
superficie se enfríe antes de tocarlo.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
Das Innere des Druckers kann sehr heiß sein. Vermeiden Sie Verletzungen,
indem Sie heiße Komponenten stets abkühlen lassen, bevor Sie ihre
Oberfläche berühren.

Warning—Potential Damage
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal frame of
the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

667
Troubleshoot a problem

13. Remove the jammed paper under the standard bin exit roller.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

14. Close door B.

15. Push down handle N1.

668
Troubleshoot a problem

16. Turn knob N2 counterclockwise.

17. Remove the jammed paper.

Warning—Potential Damage
To prevent damage to the printer, remove any hand accessories before removing the
jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

669
Troubleshoot a problem

18. Put handle N1 back into place.

19. Close door N5, and then close door N4.
20. Close door F.
21. Return handles R1 and R4 back into their original positions.
22. Close door H.

Paper jam in the booklet maker

1. Remove jammed paper in bin 2.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

2. Open door H.

670
Troubleshoot a problem

3. Turn knobs R6, R11, and R10 clockwise.

4. Pull out the booklet maker.

671
Troubleshoot a problem

5. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

672
Troubleshoot a problem

6. Turn knob R9 counterclockwise until it stops.

673
Troubleshoot a problem

7. Open door R8.

674
Troubleshoot a problem

8. Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

675
Troubleshoot a problem

9. Close door R8.

10. Return the booklet maker into the booklet finisher.
11. Close door H.

Network connection problems

Cannot open Embedded Web Server
Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that the printer is on.

• Make sure that the printer IP address is correct.

Notes
◦ View the IP address on the control panel.
◦ The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such
as 123.123.123.123.

• Make sure that you installed a supported browser.

◦ Internet Explorer version 11 or later

◦ Microsoft Edge
◦ Safari version 6 or later

676
Troubleshoot a problem

◦ Google Chrome™ version 32 or later

◦ Mozilla Firefox version 24 or later
• Check if the network connection is working.

Note: If the connection is not working, then contact your administrator.

• Make sure that the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure. For more
information, see the documentation that came with the print server.
• Check if the web proxy servers are disabled.

Note: If the servers are disabled, then contact your administrator.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Cannot connect the printer to the Wi‑Fi network

Try one or more of the following:

• From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports > Network Overview >
Active Adapter, and then select Auto.
• Make sure that the computer is connected to the correct Wi‑Fi network. For more
information, see Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network on page 362.

Note: Some routers may share the default Wi‑Fi name.

• Make sure that you entered the correct network password.

Note: Take note of the spaces, numbers, and capitalization in the password.

• Make sure that the correct wireless security mode is selected. From the control panel,
navigate to Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wireless Security Mode.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Hardware options problems

Cannot detect internal option
Try one or more of the following:

• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer.
• Print the Menu Settings Page, and then check if the internal option appears in the Installed
Features list. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Reports > Menu Settings
Page.
• Check if the internal option is installed properly into the controller board.

677
Troubleshoot a problem

1. Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2. Make sure that the internal option is installed into the appropriate connector on the
controller board.
3. Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is
near the product and easily accessible.

• Check if the internal option is available in the print driver.

Note: If necessary, manually add the internal option in the print driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see Adding available options in the
print driver on page 139.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Internal solutions port does not operate correctly

Try one or more of the following:

• Print the Menu Settings Page, and then check if the internal solutions port (ISP) appears in
the Installed Features list. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Reports > Menu
Settings Page.
• Remove, and then reinstall the ISP. For more information, see Installing an internal solutions
port on page 347.
• Check the cable and the ISP connection.

1. Use the correct cable, and then make sure that it is securely connected to the ISP.
2. Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected to its slot on the
controller board.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Parallel or serial interface card does not operate

correctly
Try one or more of the following:

• Print the Menu Settings Page, and then check if the parallel or serial interface card appears
in the Installed Features list. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Reports > Menu
Settings Page.
• Remove, and then reinstall the parallel or serial interface card. For more information, see
Installing an internal solutions port on page 347.
• Check the connection between the cable and the parallel or serial interface card.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

678
Troubleshoot a problem

Defective flash detected

Try one or more of the following:

• Replace the defective flash memory.

• Select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources

Try one or more of the following:

• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

• Delete fonts, macros, and other data that are stored in the flash memory.
• Install a storage drive.

Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash
memory are deleted.

Issues with supplies

Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch
To correct this problem, purchase a cartridge with the correct region that matches the
printer region, or purchase a worldwide cartridge.

• The first number in the message after 42 indicates the region of the printer.
• The second number in the message after 42 indicates the region of the cartridge.

Region Numeric code

Worldwide or Undefined region 0

North America (United States, Canada) 1

European Economic Area, Western Europe, 2

Nordic countries, Switzerland

Asia Pacific 3

Latin America 4

Rest of Europe, Middle East, Africa 5

Australia, New Zealand 6

Invalid region 9

679
Troubleshoot a problem

Note: To find the region settings of the printer and toner cartridge, print the Print
Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.

Refilled regular [color] cartridge

The printer has detected a Lexmark Regular cartridge that has been refilled with
non‑genuine toner by a party other than Lexmark.

Select OK to continue.

All printer component life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and
parts and may deliver unpredictable results when using supplies or parts in your Lexmark
printer that are remanufactured by parties other than Lexmark.

For more information, see the printer statement of limited warranty.

Non‑Lexmark supply
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and
parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of
the printer and its imaging components.

All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage
beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.

Warning—Potential Damage
Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused
by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.

To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies
or parts in your printer, touch and hold the error message on the display using two fingers
for 15 seconds. When a confirmation dialog box appears, touch Continue.

If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from
your printer and install a genuine Lexmark supply or part. For more information, see Using
genuine Lexmark parts and supplies on page 478.

If the printer does not print after clearing the error message, then reset the supply usage
counter.

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration
Menu > Supply Usage And Counters.
2. Select the part or supply that you want to reset, and then select Start.
3. Read the warning message, and then select Continue.

680
Troubleshoot a problem

4. Using two fingers, touch the display for 15 seconds to clear the message.

Note: If you are unable to reset the supply usage counters, then return the supply
item to the place of purchase.

Paper feed problems

Paper curl
Try one or more of the following:

• Adjust the guides in the tray to the correct position for the paper loaded.
• Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog. Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control panel. Navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

• Remove the paper, flip it over, and then reload the paper.
• Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store the paper in its original
wrapper until you are ready to use it.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Envelope seals when printing

Try one or more of the following:

• Use an envelope that has been stored in a dry environment.

Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the flaps.

• Make sure that the paper type is set to Envelope. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Collated printing does not work

Try one or more of the following:

681
Troubleshoot a problem

• From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Print > Layout > Collate, and then select On
[1,2,1,2,1,2].
• From the document that you are trying to print, open the Printing Preferences or Print dialog,
and then select Collate.
• Reduce the number of pages to print.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Tray linking does not work

Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure that the linked trays contain the same paper size, orientation, and paper type.
• Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly.
• Set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded in the linked trays. From the
control panel, navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.
• Make sure that Tray Linking is set to Automatic. For more information, see Linking trays on
page 135.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Paper frequently jams

Try one or more of the following:

• Check if the paper is loaded correctly.

Notes
◦ Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly.
◦ Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
◦ Make sure to print on the recommended paper size and paper type.

• Set the correct paper size and paper type. From the control panel, navigate to Settings >
Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type.
• Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store the paper in its original
wrapper until you are ready to use it.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Jammed pages are not reprinted

1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device > Notifications > Jam Content
Recovery.
2. In the Jam Recovery menu, select On or Auto.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

682
Troubleshoot a problem

Color quality problems

Modifying the colors in printed output
1. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging >
Color Correction.
2. In the Color Correction menu, select Manual.
3. In the Color Correction Content menu, select the appropriate color conversion setting.

Object type Color conversion tables

RGB Image ◦ Vivid—Produces brighter, more

saturated colors and can be
RGB Text applied to all incoming color
formats.
RGB Graphics ◦ sRGB Display—Produces an
output that approximates the colors
shown on a computer monitor.
Black toner usage is optimized for
printing photographs.
◦ Display‑True Black—Produces an
output that approximates the colors
shown on a computer monitor. This
setting uses only black toner to
create all levels of neutral gray.
◦ sRGB Vivid—Provides an
increased color saturation for the
sRGB Display color correction.
Black toner usage is optimized for
printing business graphics.
◦ Off

CMYK Image ◦ US CMYK—Applies color

correction to approximate the
CMYK Text Specifications for Web Offset
Publishing (SWOP) color output.
CMYK Graphics ◦ Euro CMYK—Applies color
correction to approximate
Euroscale color output.
◦ Vivid CMYK—Increases the color
saturation of the US CMYK color
correction setting.
◦ Off

FAQ about color printing

What is RGB color?

RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue
used to produce a certain color. Red, green, and blue light can be added in various

683
Troubleshoot a problem

amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. Computer screens,

scanners, and digital cameras use this method to display colors.

What is CMYK color?

CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta,
yellow, and black used to reproduce a particular color. Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. Printing presses, inkjet printers, and color laser printers create colors
in this manner.

How is color specified in a document to be printed?

Software programs are used to specify and modify the document color using RGB or
CMYK color combinations. For more information, see the software program Help topics.

How does the printer know what color to print?

When printing a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent
to the printer and is passed through color conversion tables. Color is translated into the
appropriate amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner used to produce the color
you want. The object information determines the application of color conversion tables. For
example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a
different color conversion table to photographic images.

What is manual color correction?

When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color
conversion tables to process objects. Manual color correction settings are specific to the
type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images). It is also specific to how the color of
the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). To apply a
different color conversion table manually, see Modifying colors in printed output.

If the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations, then
manual color correction is not useful. It is also not effective if the software program or the
computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors. In most situations, setting
the Color Correction to Auto generates preferred colors for the documents.

How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?

From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These sets
are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting
any sample set generates multiple‑page prints consisting of hundreds of colored boxes.
Each box contains a CMYK or RGB combination, depending on the table selected. The

684
Troubleshoot a problem

observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled
on the box through the selected color conversion table.

By examining Color Samples sets, you can identify the box with color closest to the color
being matched. The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying
the color of the object in a software program. For more information, see the software
program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to use the selected color
conversion table for the particular object.

Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends
on:

• The Color Correction setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual)

• The type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images)
• How the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK
combinations)

If the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations, then the
Color Samples pages are not useful. Additionally, some software programs adjust the RGB
or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. In these
situations, the printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.

The print appears tinted

Try one or more of the following:

• From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging, and
then select Color Adjust.
• From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging, select
Color Balance, and then adjust the settings.

If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

Contacting customer support

Before contacting customer support, make sure to have the following information:

• Printer problem
• Error message
• Printer model type and serial number

Go to https://support.lexmark.com to receive email or chat support, or browse through the

library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads.
Technical support via telephone is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call
1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, go to the international support contact
directory.

685
Recycle and dispose

Recycle and dispose

Recycling Lexmark products
1. Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2. Select your country or region.
3. Select a recycling program.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that
Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive
manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer
greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings. Lexmark also offers
recycling of packaging components in some countries or regions. For more information, go
to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities
may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist.
Facilities may not exist in your area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in.
Lexmark recycles the box.

686
Notices

Notices
Product information
Product name:

Lexmark CS963e Printer

Machine type:

5066
Models:

680

Edition and legal notices

Edition notices
June 2024
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not
allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this
statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later
editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be
made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the
manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any
reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used
instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products,
programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the
user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, go to https://support.lexmark.com.
For information on Lexmark's privacy policy governing the use of this product, go to
www.lexmark.com/privacy.
For information on supplies and downloads, go to www.lexmark.com.
© 2024 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.

687
Notices

GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that
term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer
Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1
through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial
Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as
Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Trademarks
Lexmark, the Lexmark logo, and MarkNet are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Lexmark International, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Android, Google Play, and Google Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.
Macintosh, macOS, Safari, and AirPrint are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries. Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has
been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft
group of companies.
The Mopria™ word mark is a registered and/or unregistered trademark of Mopria Alliance,
Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard
Company’s designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in
its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This
means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and
that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States
and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD:\NOTICES
directory of the installation software CD.

688
Notices

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK

LASER PRINTERS, LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND
LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the
U.S., refer to the country-specific warranty information that came with your product.

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use,
and not for resale, from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as
“Remarketer.”

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like
new parts

—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a
Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option
is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be
required to present the feature or option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this
statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should
transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase
receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for
any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original
contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/
Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit
is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or
“Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You
may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid
and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location. You are responsible for loss of,
or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.

689
Notices

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced
becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or
repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced,
altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if
the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in
your printer to the latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause
counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and
inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products
will not be impacted.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs,
data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized
servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For
products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available
or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the
durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modification or unauthorized attachments

—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals,
instructions or guidance

—Unsuitable physical or operating environment

—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer

—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle

—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications

—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or

parts

—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not
furnished by Lexmark

690
Notices

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS

THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR
CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO
THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED
UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY
PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS
PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE
SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim
concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product
under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the
following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the
amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not
apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal
property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER
ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark
or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by
you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers
of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not
cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or
exclusions contained above may not apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that
vary from state to state.

Specifications
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR,
Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class

691
Notices

1 consumer laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1:2014, EN

60825-1:2014+A11:2021, and EN 50689:2021.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer
are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level
during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service conditions. The printer
has a non-serviceable printhead assembly that contains a laser with the following
specifications:

Class: IIIb (3b) AlGaAs

Nominal output power (milliwatts): 25

Wavelength (nanometers): 770–800

Temperature information

Operating temperature and relative humidity 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F) and 15 to 80% RH
(RH) 1
15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F) and 8 to 80%
RH

Maximum wet-bulb temperature2: 22.8°C

(73°F)

Non-condensing environment

Printer / cartridge / imaging unit long- 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F) and 8 to 80%
term storage2 RH

Maximum wet-bulb temperature2: 22.8°C

(73°F)

Printer / cartridge / imaging unit short-term -40 to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)

shipping3
1 In some cases, performance specifications (such as cartridge usage and first-page-out
speed) must be measured at a standard office environment of approximately 22.2°C
(72°F) and 45% RH.
2Supplies shelf life is approximately 2 years. This is based on storage in a standard office
environment at 22°C (72°F) and 45% humidity.
3 Wet-bulb temperature is determined by the air temperature and the relative humidity.

Información de la energía de México

Consumo de energía en operación:
811
Consumo de energía en modo de espera:
0.2
Cantidad de producto por unidad de energía consumida:

692
Notices

4.07 páginas/Wh

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption

(Watts)

Printing The product is generating One-sided: 811;

hard‑copy output from Two-sided: 776
electronic inputs.

Ready The product is waiting for a 45.5

print job.

Sleep Mode The product is in a 1.1

high‑level energy‑saving
mode.

Hibernate The product is in a low‑level 0.2

energy‑saving mode.

Off The product is plugged into 0.2

an electrical outlet, but the
power switch is turned off.
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged
measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep
Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity.
The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified
period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this 15
product (in minutes):
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1
minute and 120 minutes, or between 1 minute and 114 minutes, depending on the printer
model. If the printer speed is less than or equal to 30 pages per minute, then you can set
the timeout only up to 60 minutes or 54 minutes, depending on the printer model. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase
the response time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value
maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Some models support a Deep Sleep Mode, which further reduces power consumption
after longer periods of inactivity.

693
Notices

Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode.
When operating in Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down
safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:

• Using the Hibernate Timeout

• Using the Schedule Power modes

Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this 3 days

product in all countries or regions
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode
can be modified between one hour and one month.
Notes on EPEAT-registered imaging equipment products:

• Standby power level occurs in Hibernate or Off mode.

• The product shall automatically power down to a standby power level of ≤ 1 W. The auto
standby function (Hibernate or Off) shall be enabled at product shipment.

Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to
completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the
electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to estimate the total product energy usage. Since power
consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should
be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy
usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Environmental and sustainability notices

Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in
conformance with ISO 9296.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

694
Notices

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA

Printing One-sided mono: 51;

One-sided color: 52;
Two-sided mono: 54;
Two-sided color: 55

Ready 14
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

directive

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic
products in countries of the European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.

India E-Waste notice

This product including components, consumables, parts and spares complies with the
“India E-Waste Rules” and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium,
polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding
0.1% by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in the
Rule.

695
Notices

Lithium‑ion rechargeable battery

This product may contain a coin-cell, lithium-ion rechargeable battery, which should only
be removed by a trained technician. Crossed-out wheelie bin means the product should
not be discarded as unsorted waste but must be sent to separate collection facilities for
recovery and recycling. In the event the battery is removed, do not dispose of the battery in
your household waste. There may be separate collection systems for batteries in your local
community, such as a battery-recycling drop-off location. The separate collection of waste
batteries assures appropriate treatment of waste including reuse and recycling and
prevents any potential negative effects on human health and environment. Please
responsibly dispose of the batteries.

Regulation (EU) 2023/1542

This product may contain a coin-cell lithium rechargeable battery. This battery complies
with Regulation (EU) 2023/1542. Compliance is indicated by the CE marking:

This product may contain one of the following coin-cell batteries:

• Battery identification: Seiko Model Number MS621FE

Manufacturer: Seiko Instruments Inc.

Manufacturer address: 8, Nakase 1-chome, Mihama-ku, Chiba-shi, Chiba 261-8507, Japan

• Battery identification: Panasonic Model Number ML621
Manufacturer: Panasonic Energy Co., Ltd.

Manufacturer address: 1-1 Matsushita-cho, Moriguchi City, Osaka 570-8511, Japan

• Battery identification: FDK Model Number ML621
Manufacturer: FDK Corporation

Manufacturer address: Shibaura Crystal Shinagawa, 1-6-41 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo

108-8212 Japan

696
Notices

WEEE (Turkey)
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.

Guide de Tri pour la France

Lexmark soutient les programmes de collecte des produits en fin de vie, partout dans le
monde, afin de faciliter leur recyclage.
Là où les systèmes locaux de collecte des déchets électriques et électroniques sont
disponibles, les imprimantes et leurs composants sont recyclables. Ne jetez pas
l'imprimante, les fournitures, l'emballage ou tout autre contenu du boîtier de l'imprimante
de la même manière que les déchets ménagers normaux. Consultez les autorités locales
pour connaître les possibilités d'élimination et de recyclage. Cette notice s'applique aux
modèles d'imprimantes mentionnés dans ce guide.
Le logo Triman, élaboré à partir du décret français 2014-15733, est une signalétique
commune obligatoire pour les produits en fin de vie. Il permet d'harmoniser les différents
systèmes de collecte en France. Ce symbole, plus facile à comprendre pour les citoyens
et les consommateurs en France, permet de trier correctement les produits recyclables en
fin de vie.
Eléments d’emballage:

Papiers:

Produits et batteries:

697
Notices

Environmental labeling for packaging

Per Commission Regulation Decision 97/129/EC Legislative Decree 152/2006, the product
packaging may contain one or more of the following symbols.
This symbol indicates that the packaging
may contain corrugated fiberboard.

This symbol indicates that the packaging

may contain non-corrugated fiberboard.

This symbol indicates that the packaging

may contain paper.

For more information, go to www.lexmark.com/recycle, and then choose your country or

region. Information on available packaging recycling programs is included with the
information on product recycling.

Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste.
Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program allows you to return used cartridges for free to
Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to
Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. The boxes used to return the
cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, do the following:

1. Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.

698
Notices

2. Select your country or region.

3. Select Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.

環境保護署廢乾電池回收標誌注意事項
依環境保護署公告之廢棄物清理法第十五條應負回收、清除、處理責任之乾電池製造或輸入
業者，乾電池裝配於物品中，且隨該物品銷售、贈送或促銷予消費者，得於該物品之個包
裝、標籤或說明書上，標示回收標誌及回收標誌相鄰處說明「廢電池請回收」字樣。廢乾電
池之回收標誌圖樣及回收標誌相鄰處說明字樣如下所示。請您將廢棄之乾電池送到標示可提
供廢電池回收的廠商以提供正確的廢電池處理方法。

經濟部標準檢驗局 (BSMI) 電池聲明

BSMI RoHS information 限用物質含有情況標示

適用於印表機、雷射印表機、多功能複合機或多功能印表機。
Applies to Printer, Laser Printer, Multifunction Machine, or Multifunction Printer.
型號（型式）：請參閱「注意事項」章節或「控管資訊」章節。
Type designation (Type): Please see the “Notices” section or the “Regulatory information”
section.

699
Notices

中国 RoHS 计划的信息

Part name Toxic and hazardous substances or elements

Lead Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Poly- Poly-

(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) Chromium brominated brominated
(Cr VI) biphenyl diphenylether
(PBB) (PBDE)

Circuit X O O O O O
boards

Power X O O O O O
supply

Power X O O O O O
cords

Connectors X O O O O O

700
Notices

Part name Toxic and hazardous substances or elements

Lead Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Poly- Poly-

(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) Chromium brominated brominated
(Cr VI) biphenyl diphenylether
(PBB) (PBDE)

Mechanical X O O O O O
assemblies
—shafts,
rollers

Mechanical X O O O O O
assemblies
—motors

Mechanical X O O O O O
assemblies
—other

Scanner X O O O O O
assembly,
for
multifunction
device
only

LCD/LED X O O O O O
display

701
Notices

Part name Toxic and hazardous substances or elements

Lead Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Poly- Poly-

(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) Chromium brominated brominated
(Cr VI) biphenyl diphenylether
(PBB) (PBDE)

This table is based on SJ/T 11364 regulations.

O: Indicates that the content of the toxic and hazardous substance in all the homogenous
materials of the part is below the concentration limit requirement as described in GB/T 26572.

X: Indicates that the content of the toxic and hazardous substance in at least one
homogenous material of the part exceeds the concentration limit requirement as described in
GB/T 26572.

This product is compliant with the China RoHS Directive concerning the restriction of use of
certain hazardous substances.

The Environmentally Friendly Use Period (EFUP) for all enclosed products and their
components are per the symbol shown here, unless otherwise marked. Certain components
may have a different EFUP and so are marked to reflect such. The Environmentally Friendly
Use Period is valid only when the product is operated under the conditions defined in the
product manual.

ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR® emblem on the product or on a start-
up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY
STAR requirements as of the date of manufacture.

702
Notices

Notices for wireless products

Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains regulatory information that applies only to wireless models.
If in doubt as to whether your model is a wireless model, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Modular component notice

Wireless models contain one of the following modular components:
Lexmark MarkNet N8450 / AzureWave AW-CM467-SUR; FCC ID:TLZ-CM467; IC:6100A-
CM467
To determine which modular components are installed in your particular product, refer to
the labeling on your actual product.

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of
the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must
be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF
exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Innovation, Science and Economic Development

Canada
This device complies with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada

Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d'Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toutes

703
Notices

les interférences, y compris les celles qui peuvent entraîner un fonctionnement

indésirable.

Para su uso en México

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible
que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o
dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directive
2014/53/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to radio equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle
Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The EEA/EU authorized representative is: Lexmark
International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095
Budapest HUNGARY. The EEA/EU Importer is: Lexmark International Technology S.à.r.l.
20, Route de Pré-Bois, ICC Building, Bloc A, CH-1215 Genève, Switzerland. A declaration
of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the
Authorized Representative or may be obtained at www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/
regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking:

Restrictions

This radio equipment is restricted to indoor use only. Outdoor use is prohibited. This
restriction applies to all the countries listed in the table below:

704
Notices

AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE

EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT

LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT

RO SE SI SK TR UK
(NI)

EU and other countries statement of radio transmitter

operational frequency bands and maximum RF power

This radio product transmits in either the 2.4GHz (2.412–2.472GHz in the EU) or 5GHz
(5.15–5.35, 5.47–5.725GHz in the EU) bands. The maximum transmitter EIRP power
output, including antenna gain, is ≤ 20dBm for both bands.

United Kingdom (UK) conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the Radio Equipment
Regulations 2017.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle
Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The UK Importer is: Lexmark International Ltd, Quantum
House, 60 Norden Road, Maidenhead SL6 4AY, United Kingdom. A declaration of
conformity is available upon request from the UK Importer or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/uk-declaration-of-conformity.html.
Compliance is indicated by the UKCA marking:

Restrictions or requirements in the UK

This radio equipment is restricted to indoor use only. Outdoor use is prohibited.

UK statement of radio transmitter operational frequency bands

and maximum RF power

This radio product transmits in either the 2.4GHz (2.412–2.472 GHz in the UK) or 5GHz
(5.15–5.35, 5.47–5.725 in the UK) bands. The maximum transmitter EIRP power output,
including antenna gain, is ≤ 20dBm for both bands.

705
Notices

NCC Type Approval Devices Notice

Low-power Radio-frequency Devices Notice
NCC型式認證器材注意事項
依據低功率射頻器材技術規範
取得審驗證明之低功率射頻器材，非經核准，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加
大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。低功率射頻器材之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通
信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。前述合法通信，
指依電信管理法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射頻器材須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫
療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
應避免影響附近雷達系統之操作。
高增益指向性天線只得應用於固定式點對點系統。

Notice to users in Thailand

ประกาศถึงผู้ใช้ในประเทศไทย
This radiocommunication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance
with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radiocommunication Equipment on Human Health
announced by the National Telecommunications Commission.
เครื่องวิทยุคมนาคมนี้มีระดับการแผ่คลื่นแม่เหล็กไฟฟ้าสอดคล้องตามมาตรฐาน ความปลอดภัยต่อ
สุขภาพของมนุษย์จากการใช้เครื่องวิทยุคมนาคมที่คณะกรรมการกิจการโทรคมนาคมแห่งชาติประกาศกํา
หนด

706
Notices

Class A device notices

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.

707
Notices

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by
using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference

for a Class A computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such
as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach.
Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a
violation of FCC regulations.

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

Telephone: (859) 232–2000

E-mail: [email protected]

BSMI EMC 注意事項

警告: 為避免電磁干擾，本產品不應安裝或使用於住宅環境。

Innovation, Science and Economic Development

Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Standard ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’Innovation, Sciences et

Développement économique Canada

Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne
relative aux équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

CCC EMC 注意事项

警告：在居住环境中，运行此设备可能会造成无线电干扰。

708
Notices

日本の VCCI 規定

한국 KC 인증서

Aviso aos usuários de produtos Classe A no Brasil

Este produto não é apropriado para uso em ambientes domésticos, pois poderá causar
interferências eletromagnéticas que obrigam o usuário a tomar medidas necessárias para
minimizar estas interferências.

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives
2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU, and 2011/65/EU as amended by (EU) 2015/863 on the
approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical
and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle
Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The EEA/EU authorized representative is: Lexmark
International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095
Budapest HUNGARY. The EEA/EU Importer is: Lexmark International Technology S.à.r.l.

709
Notices

20, Route de Pré-Bois, ICC Building, Bloc A, CH-1215 Genève, Switzerland. A declaration
of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the
Authorized Representative or may be obtained at www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/
regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55032 and safety requirements of EN
62368-1.

United Kingdom (UK) conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the Electromagnetic
Compatibility Regulations 2016, the Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016, and
the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic
Equipment Regulations 2012.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle
Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The UK Importer is: Lexmark International Ltd, Quantum
House, 60 Norden Road, Maidenhead SL6 4AY, United Kingdom. A declaration of
conformity is available upon request from the UK Importer or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/uk-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of BS EN 55032 and safety requirements of BS EN
62368-1.

Radio interference notice

Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN 55032 Class A limits
and immunity requirements of EN 55035. This product is not intended to be used in
residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Other regulatory notices

高溫警告標籤

此符號表示該表面或元件會發熱。

請當心：為避免被發熱表面或元件燙傷的危
險，請先讓該表面或元件冷卻之後再觸摸。

Deutsche Kontaktinformationen

Modell 680

710
Notices

Gerätetyp 5066

Adresse Lexmark Deutschland GmbH

Dornhofstraße 44

63263 Neu-Isenburg

Telefon 0180 - 600 5000

E-mail [email protected]

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch the areas near these symbols
without first touching a metal surface in an area away from the symbol.
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge when performing maintenance tasks such
as clearing paper jams or replacing supplies, touch any exposed metal frame of the
printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer even if the symbol is not
present.

Applicability of Regulation (EU) 2019/2015 and (EU)

2019/2020
Per Commission Regulation (EU) 2019/2015 and (EU) 2019/2020, the light source
contained within this product or its component is intended to be used for Image Capture or
Image Projection only, and is not intended for use in other applications.

The UK Product Security and Telecommunications

Infrastructure Act 2022 (PSTI Act)—Summary Statement
of Compliance
Lexmark International Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY 40550 USA,
declares that this product complies with the applicable security requirements in Schedule 1
of The Product Security and Telecommunications Infrastructure (Security Requirements for
Relevant Connectable Products) Regulations 2023. The defined support period for this
product can be found at the following web page: https://www.lexmark.com/firmware-eos.

711
Notices

A copy of the Statement of Compliance is available for download at the following web
page: https://www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/all-regulatory-
docs.html.

Thailand NBTC technical standards conformity

statement
คำประกาศเรื่องการเป็นไปตามมาตรฐานทางเทคนิคของ กสทช. ประเทศไทย
This telecommunication equipment conforms to the technical standards or requirements of
NBTC.
เครื่องโทรคมนาคมและอุปกรณ์นี้มีความสอดคล้องตามมาตรฐานหรือข้อกำหนดทางเทคนิคของ กสทช.

Aviso aos usuários de produtos no Brasil

Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode
causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados.

712
Index

Index
1 adjusting headphone volume 116

1500‑sheet tray adjusting speaker volume 116

loading 126 adjusting toner darkness 375

installing 182 adding printers to a computer 137

adjusting brightness 558

2
avoiding paper jams 603
2000-sheet tandem tray
loading 122
B

2000‑sheet tandem tray bookmarks

installing 162 creating 108

2 x 550‑sheet tray booklet finisher

installing 152 installing 310

using 474
5
black imaging unit
550‑sheet tray
ordering 480
loading 117
replacing 484
installing 143
booklet finisher top bin extension
550‑sheet tray cover 517
replacing 519
A
blank pages 581
activating Voice Guidance 109
black images 591
adding hardware options
C
in print driver 139
canceling print job 374
adding contacts 109
customizing the display 107
adding groups 109
changing the wallpaper 107
Address Book 109
creating bookmarks 108
adjusting speech rate
customizing paper size 117
Voice Guidance 116
configuration file
Voice Guidance 116
exporting 138

713
Index

importing 138 checking, supplies status 476

changing the printer port settings after installing cleaning the printhead lenses 551
ISP 362
conserving supplies 558
connecting printer to Wi‑Fi 362
color correction 683
connecting printer to wireless network 362
contacting customer support 685
configuring Wi‑Fi Direct 363
customer support
connecting to wireless network
contacting 685
using PIN method 363
clearing jam
using Push Button method 363
in standard tray 607
checking network connection 366
in 550‑sheet tray 609
confidential print jobs
2 x 550-sheet tray 614
configuring 372
in 2000‑sheet tandem tray 616
printing 373
in multipurpose feeder 613
connecting computer to printer 365
in 1500-sheet tray 617
control panel
s standard bin 625
using 23
in fuser 619
cabinet
in duplex unit 619
installing 173
in staple finisher 625
card reader
in folding paper transport 629
installing 355
in staple, hole punch finisher 633
connecting mobile device
in booklet finisher 651
to printer 364
cartridge, printer region mismatch 679
connecting to printer confidential documents do not print 601
using Wi‑Fi Direct 364 cannot open Embedded Web Server 676
creating booklet 474 collated printing does not work 681
configuring supply notifications 476
color quality problem
color imaging kit print appears tinted 685
ordering 480 cannot detect internal option 677
replacing 495 cannot connect printer to Wi‑Fi 677
cleaning printer 550 colored background on print 584
cleaning touch screen 551 cut off text in print 592

714
Index

cut off images in print 592 emptying hole punch box 554

crooked print 590 emission notices 694, 703, 709, 709

error codes 563

D
error messages 563
deactivating Voice Guidance 110
enabling USB port 603
Display Customization
envelope seals when printing 681
using 107

deactivating the Wi‑Fi network 365 F

documents, printing firmware card 102

from computer 369 factory default settings

directory list restoring 367

printing 374 font sample list

display brightness printing 374

adjusting 558 folding paper transport

defective flash memory 679 installing 215

dark print 582 installing 257

dots on printed page 588 installing 310

finding printer information 17

E
flash drive, printing from 371
exporting configuration file 138
folding printed copies 475
erasing
folding copied documents 475
storage drive 367
fuser maintenance kit
hard disk 367
ordering 480
intelligent storage drive 367
fuser
printer memory 367
replacing 509
volatile memory 367
fan cover
nonvolatile memory 367
replacing 526
erasing printer memory 368
FCC notices 703
enabling Magnification mode 115

Ethernet port 105 G

email alerts genuine parts and supplies 478

setting up 476 genuine Lexmark parts and supplies 478

715
Index

gray background on print 584 configuring 557

ghost images 583 hole punch box

H replacing 521

emptying 554
hard disk 102
humidity around the printer 692
hard disk
held documents do not print 601
erasing 367
hardware options problem
headphone volume, adjusting 116
cannot detect internal option 677
held jobs
horizontal dark lines 595
configuring 372
horizontal white lines 597
printing 373

holding print jobs 372 I

hard disk storage drive 368 indicator light 25

home screen icons internal options 102

using 24 internal options

hardware options intelligent storage drive 341

cabinet 173 card reader 355

folding paper transport 215 intelligent storage drive 102, 368

paper transport 235 intelligent storage drive

staple, hole punch finisher 235 erasing 367

folding paper transport 257 installing 341

staple, hole punch finisher 257 installing the printer software 136

folding paper transport 310 installing the print driver 136

booklet finisher 310 importing configuration file 138

2000‑sheet tandem tray 162 installing cabinet 173

2 x 550‑sheet tray 152 installing paper transport 286

550‑sheet tray 143 installing

1500‑sheet tray 182 paper transport 286

staple finisher 191 booklet finisher 286

installing 207 installing booklet finisher 286

Hibernate mode internal solutions port

716
Index

installing 347 loading tray 126

installing options loading paper

internal solutions port 347 in multipurpose feeder 131

installing 2000‑sheet tandem tray 162 loading letterhead 131

installing 2 x 550‑sheet tray 152 loading prepunched paper 131

installing 550‑sheet tray 143 locating jam areas 605

installing 1500-sheet tray 182 light print 586

installing staple finisher 191

M
installing offset stacker 207
managing screen saver 107
identifying jam locations 605
mobile device
internal option is not detected 677
printing from 369
internal solutions port does not operate correctly
678 printing from 370

incorrect margins 585 printing from 370

printing from 370

J
Magnification mode
jams, paper
enabling 115
avoiding 603
moving the printer 104, 558
jammed pages are not reprinted 682
Mopria Print Service 370
job prints from the wrong tray 601
menu
job prints on the wrong paper 601
Preferences 377
L
Remote Operator Panel 381
letterhead Eco‑Mode 380
selecting 29 Accessibility 388
linking trays 135 Power Management 386
Lexmark Print Notifications 381
using 369 Restore Factory Defaults 389
locating the security slot 26 Share Data with Lexmark 387
loading 2000-sheet tandem tray 122 Configuration Menu 389
loading trays 122, 117 Out of Service Erase 396
loading 550‑sheet tray 117 Update firmware 398

717
Index

About this Printer 398 Security Audit Log 458

Layout 399 Login Restrictions 461

Finishing 400 Confidential Print Setup 462

Setup 403 Erase Temporary Data Files 464

Quality 407 Solutions LDAP Settings 464

Job Accounting 409 Miscellaneous 465

PDF 411 Encryption 463

PostScript 412 Cloud Services Enrollment 466

PCL 414 Menu Settings Page 467

Image 418 Device 467

Media Configuration 420 Print 468

Bin Configuration 421 Network 468

Flash Drive Print 422 Troubleshooting 469

Wireless 426 Forms Merge 469

Mobile Services Management 437 Tray Configuration 419

Wi‑Fi Direct 436 Menu Settings Page

Ethernet 437 printing 471

Network Overview 425 making booklet 474

SNMP 444 meter reading, viewing 477

TCP/IP 442 modifying color output 683

IPSec 445 manual color correction 683

802.1x 448 missing colors 587

HTTP/FTP Settings 450 mottled print and dots 588

USB 452
N
LPD Configuration 449
nonvolatile memory
Restrict external network access 453
erasing 367
ThinPrint 452
Nonvolatile memory 368
Manage Permissions 455
navigating the screen
Default Login Methods 457
using gestures 110
Schedule USB Devices 457
notices 694, 698, 693, 694, 703, 709, 709, 710
Local Accounts 456

718
Index

noise emission levels 694 selecting 29

Not enough free space in flash memory for paper sizes

resources 679
supported 29
non‑genuine toner 680
supported 33
Non‑Lexmark supply 680
supported 86
O
supported 38
on‑screen keyboard supported 56
using 115 supported 69
offset stacker paper weights
installing 207 supported 96
using 473 paper types
offset stacking 473 supported 96
ordering supplies print driver
toner cartridge 478 adding hardware options 139
black imaging unit 480 installing 136
color imaging kit 480
print job
staple cartridge 480
canceling 374
waste toner bottle 480
printer software
fuser maintenance kit 480
installing 136

P personal identification numbers

paper enabling 117

recycled 28 printer port settings

selecting 26 changing 362

preprinted forms 29 printer connection to network

letterhead 29 checking 366
printer status 25 printer settings
printer condition 25 restoring factory default 367
paper characteristics 26 printing
paper guidelines 26 from computer 369
preprinted forms held jobs 373

719
Index

confidential print jobs 373 printing reports 477

font sample list 374 printing logs 477

directory list 374 printed sheets, viewing 477

from a mobile device 370 printer, cleaning 550

from a mobile device 370 power save modes

using Mopria Print Service 370 configuring 557

from a mobile device 370 paper transport connector cover

using Wi‑Fi Direct 370 replacing 530
from flash drive 371 printer parts status
Menu Settings Page 471 checking 476
printing documents printhead lenses
from a mobile device 369 cleaning 551
placing separator sheets 374 product recycling 686
printer memory packaging material 686
erasing 367 paper jams
printer menus 376, 471 location 605
printer configurations 20 avoiding 603
printer ports 105 paper jam in standard tray 607
power cord socket 105 paper jam in 550‑sheet tray 609
printer paper jam
selecting a location for 104 2 x 550-sheet tray 614
minimum clearances 104 in 2000‑sheet tray 616
printer serial number 18 in 1500-sheet tray 617
paper transport in staple finisher 625
installing 235 in folding paper transport 629
Print Quality Test Pages 469 paper jam in multipurpose feeder 613

punching holes paper jam in standard bin 625

in printed sheets 472 paper jam in door B 619

paper transport with folding option paper jam in fuser 619

using 475 paper jam in duplex unit 619

720
Index

paper jam in staple, hole punch finisher 633 text or images cut off 592

paper jam in booklet finisher 651 toner easily rubs off 593

printer messages uneven print density 594

defective flash detected 679 skewed print 590

Not enough free space in flash memory for crooked print 590
resources 679
solid color or black images 591
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch
679 horizontal dark lines 595

refilled regular cartridge 680 vertical dark lines appear on prints 596

Non‑Lexmark supply 680 horizontal white lines 597

printing problem vertical white lines 598

print jobs do not print 600 repeating print defects 600

printer is not responding 602 printer is not responding 602

job prints from the wrong tray 601 paper curl 681

job prints on the wrong paper 601 paper feed problem

slow printing 601 envelope seals when printing 681

unable to read flash drive 603 collated printing does not work 681

print jobs not printed 600 paper frequently jams 682

print jobs do not print 600 tray linking does not work 682

print quality problem paper frequently jams 682

confidential and other held documents do not print problem

print 601
jammed pages are not reprinted 682
paper curl 681
print appears tinted 685
gray or colored background 584
printer options problem
dark print 582
internal solutions port 678
white pages 581
parallel interface card 678
blank pages 581
serial interface card 678
missing colors 587
R
incorrect margins 585
recycled paper
ghost images 583
using 28
light print 586
running a slideshow 107
mottled print and dots 588

721
Index

resetting supply usage counters 549 in standard bin 625

replacing supplies in fuser 619

toner cartridge 481 in duplex unit 619

waste toner bottle 506 in staple finisher 625

staple cartridge 533 in folding paper transport 629

staple cartridge 536 in staple, hole punch finisher 633

staple cartridge 541 in booklet finisher 651

black imaging unit 484 Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch 679

color imaging kit 495 resetting

replacing parts supply usage counters 680

tray insert 513 resetting the supply usage counters 680

size guides 514 repeating print defects 600

fuser 509 S
booklet finisher top bin extension 519
storing paper 28
hole punch box 521
supported paper sizes 29, 33, 86, 38, 56, 69
tray cover 517
supported paper weights 96
fan cover 526
supported applications 102
standard bin 524
supported flash drives 102
right cover 528
supported file types 102
paper transport connector cover 530
supported paper types 96
staple cartridge holder 546
setting paper size 117, 117
right cover setting paper type 117
replacing 528
speaker volume
recycling products 686
adjusting 116
removing paper jam spoken passwords
in standard tray 607
enabling 117
in 550‑sheet tray 609
setting up serial printing 366
2 x 550-sheet tray 614
serial printing
in 2000‑sheet tandem tray 616
setting up 366
in multipurpose feeder 613
storage drive
in 1500-sheet tray 617

722
Index

erasing 367 replacing 536

storing print jobs 372 replacing 541

separator sheets supply usage counters

placing 374 resetting 549

statement of volatility 368 resetting 680

securing printer data 368 Sleep mode

security slot configuring 557

locating 26 size guides

selecting location replacing 514

for the printer 104 standard bin

screen gestures 110 replacing 524

serial number 18 staple cartridge holder

staple, hole punch finisher replacing 546

installing 235 supplies status

installing 257 checking 476

staple finisher supplies, conserving 558

installing 191 setting up USB port 603

using 472 slow printing 601

stapling skewed print 590

printed sheets 472 solid color 591

copied documents 472

T
stapling printed sheets 472
tray linking 135
staple, hole‑punch finisher
tray unlinking 135
using 472
toner darkness
supply notifications
adjusting 375
configuring 476
touch‑screen gestures 110
setting up email alerts 476
toner cartridge
staple cartridge
ordering 478
ordering 480
replacing 481
replacing 533
touch screen, cleaning 551

723
Index

tray insert uneven print density 594

replacing 513 V
tray cover Voice Guidance
replacing 517
activating 109
temperature around the printer 692
deactivating 110
troubleshooting adjusting speech rate 116
defective flash memory 679 volatile memory 368
cannot open Embedded Web Server 676
volatile memory
print appears tinted 685
erasing 367
cannot connect printer to Wi‑Fi 677
viewing reports and logs 477
internal solutions port 678
vertical dark lines on prints 596
parallel interface card 678
vertical white lines 598
serial interface card 678
W
third‑party supplies 680
wireless networking 362
tray linking does not work 682
Wi‑Fi Direct
toner easily rubs off 593
configuring 363
U
printing from a mobile device 370
unacceptable paper 28
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
unlinking trays 135
wireless network 363
using the home screen 24
wireless network
USB port 105
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup 363
USB port
Wi‑Fi network, deactivating 365
enabling 603
waste toner bottle
using AirPrint 370
ordering 480
using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies 478
replacing 506
unable to read flash drive 603
white pages 581

724
User's Guide